Skip to main content

Full text of "Relativity, the electron theory, and gravitation"

See other formats


•NRLF 


MONOGRAPHS  ON  PHYSICS 

EDITED   BY 

SIR  J.  J.  THOMSON,  O.M.,  F.R.S. 

MASTER    OF    TRINITY    COLLEGE,    CAMBRIDGE 

AND 

FRANK  HORTON,  Sc.D. 

PROFESSOR   OF   PHYSICS   IN    THE   UNIVERSITY   OF   LONDON 


MONOGRAPHS  ON  PHYSICS. 

Edited  by  SIR  J.  J.  THOMSON,  O.M.,  F.R.S., 
Master  of  Trinity  College,  Cambridge, 

and  FRANK  HORTON,  Sc.D., 
Professor  of  Physics  in  the  University  of  London. 

THE  SPECTROSCOPY  OF  THE  EXTREME  ULTRA- 
VIOLET. By  THEODORE  LYMAN,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor 
of  Physics  in  Harvard  University.  With  Diagrams. 

RELATIVITY,  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY,  AND  GRAVI- 
TATION. By  E.  CUNNINGHAM,  M.A.,  Fellow  and  Lecturer 
of  St.  John's  College,  Cambridge. 

THE  EMISSION  OF  ELECTRICITY  FROM  HOT  BODIES. 
By  O.  W.  RICHARDSON,  F.R.S.,  Wheatstone  Professor  of 
Physics,  King's  College,  London. 

MODERN  SEISMOLOGY.  By  G.  W.  WALKER,  A.R.C.Sc., 
F.R.S.,  Deputy  University  Lecturer  in  Astrophysics  in  the 
University  of  Cambridge.  With  Plates  and  Diagrams. 

RAYS  OF  POSITIVE  ELECTRICITY  AND  THEIR  APPLI- 
CATION TO  CHEMICAL  ANALYSIS.  By  SIR  J.  J. 
THOMSON,  O.M.,  F.R.S.,  Master  of  Trinity  College,  Cam- 
bridge. With  Illustrations. 


LONGMANS,    GREEN    AND    CO. 

39  PATERNOSTER  ROW,  LONDON 
NEW  YORK,  BOMBAY,  CALCUTTA,  AND  MADRAS 


RELATIVITY 
THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 


AND 


GRAVITATION 


BY 


E.   CUNNINGHAM,   M.A. 

FELLOW   AND   LECTURER   OF  ST.    JOHN'S   COLLEGE,   CAMBRIDGE 


WITH  DIAGRAMS 


SECOND  EDITION 


LONGMANS,     GREEN     AND     CO, 

39     PATERNOSTER     ROW,     LONDON 

FOURTH  AVENUE  &  30-TH  STREET,  NEW  YORK 

BOMBAY,    CALCUTTA,    AND    MADRAS 

1921 


PRINTED    IN    GREAT    BRITAIN    BY   THE   UNIVERSITY   PRESS,    ABERDEEN 


PREFACE  TO  SECOND  EDITION. 

THE  first  edition  of  this  book  was  published  while  the 
General  Principle  of  Relativity  was  being  worked  out,  before 
it  seemed  possible  to  arrive  at  any  confirmation  from  obser- 
vation. Shortly  after,  however,  it  was  shown  that  the  new 
theory  explained  the  motion  of  the  perihelion  of  Mercury,  and 
now  the  result  of  the  Solar  Eclipse  expedition  has  clinched 
matters. 

It  seemed  best  to  leave  practically  untouched  the  account 
of  the  special  principle  as  the  natural  avenue  of  approach  to 
the  broader  view,  which  is  described  at  length  in  Part  II. 

Acknowledgment  is  due  to  the  author's  friends,  Prof.  H.  F. 
Baker  and  Mr.  E.  V.  Appleton,  who  kindly  read  through 
the  proofs  of  the  new  matter. 

E.   C 

CAMBRIDGE,  1920. 


491358 


PREFACE   TO   FIRST    EDITION. 

THIS  monograph  is  an  attempt  to  set  out  as  clearly  and  simply 
as  possible  the  relation  of  the  Principle  of  Relativity  to  the 
generally  accepted  Electron  Theory,  showing  at  what  points 
the  former  is  the  natural  and  necessary  complement  of  the 
latter. 

No  attempt  has  been  made  to  describe  to  any  great  extent 
consequences  of  the  Principle  which  would  be  for  the  most 
part  beyond  the  reach  of  experimental  investigation,  and  the 
mathematical  analysis  has  been  omitted  as  far  as  possible  with 
the  hope  of  rendering  the  account  useful  to  the  general  reader, 
especially  to  the  experimental  physicist.  Those  who  desire  to 
follow  out  the  train  of  thought  in  more  detail,  and  especially 
to  make  acquaintance  with  the  mathematical  presentation 
developed  by  Minkowski,  may  be  referred  to  the  author's 
larger  book  on  the  same  subject.  The  author's  acknow- 
ledgments are  due  to  the  Cambridge  University  Press  for 
their  permission  to  use  some  of  the  material  of  that  work 

in  the  preparation  of  this. 

E.  C. 

CAMBRIDGE,  1915. 


vi 


CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Preface  to  Second  Edition       ...  v 

Preface  to  First  Edition .  vi 

Mote  on  Vector  Notation i 

CHAPTER 

I.   Introductory «  2 

PART  I. 
THE  SPECIAL  PRINCIPLE. 

II.  The  Origin  of  the  Principle 8 

III.  The  Relativity  of  Space  and  Time 28 

IV.  The  Relativity  of  the  Electro-Magnetic  Vectors      ...         .46 
V.  Mechanics  and  the  Principle  of  Relativity       .         .         .         .61 

VI.  Minkowski's  Four-Dimension  Vectors 72 

PART  II. 

THE  GENERAL  PRINCIPLE  OF  RELATIVITY. 

VII.  The  General  Theory 86 

VIII.  Verification  of  Einstein's  Theory 113 

IX.  Further  Generalization,  Weyl's  Theory  of  Electricity      .         .  125 

Index 147 


NOTE    ON    VECTOR   NOTATION. 

VECTOR   quantities    are    denoted    throughout    the    book    by 
Clarendon  Type,  thus,  e,  h,  u. 

The  components  of  vectors  are  denoted  by  italic  type,  thus 
e  has  components  (ex,  ey)  ez\  F  has  components  (Fx,  Fy,  Fz). 

Definitions. 

(i)  Vector  Product. — The  vector  product  of  two  vectors, 
e,  h,  is  a  vector  at  right  angles  to  the  directions  of  both,  and 
of  magnitude  equal  to  the  product  of  the  magnitudes  of  the 
two  into  the  sine  of  the  angle  between  them.  It  is  denoted 
by  the  symbol  [eh]. 

The  components  of  [eh]  are 

(eyhs  -  ejiy,ejtx  -  ejtztejty  -  ejix). 
(ii)  Divergence  of  a  vector. 

~be~        ~tiev        ^er 

div  e  =  — -  +  ~~y  +  — 

<>*•         ty         tz 

=  limit  SS*«flS/V  as  V  -»  o 

where  </S  is  an  element  of  a  closed  surface  bounding  a  volume 
V,  and  en  is  the  component  of  e  normal  to  */S. 
(iii)  Curl  of  a  vector. 

curl  c      •    (^L      — v     ^L      ^     **y      — A  ^ 
V    "  ^'    ^     "  ^'     ^    "   ty* 

The  component  of  curl  e  in  a  given  direction  is 

equal  to  limit  $£5<&/S  as  S  ->  o 

where  ds  is  an  element  of  the  arc  of  a  closed  curve  which 
bounds  a  small  area  S  to  which  the  given  direction  is  normal. 


CHAPTER    I. 

INTRODUCTORY. 

I .  THE  term  Principle  of  Relativity  was  first  applied  to  the 
hypothesis  that  it  is  impossible  by  means  of  physical  experi- 
ments to  determine  the  absolute  velocity  of  a  body  through 
space.  This  was  introduced  by  Einstein  in  1905  not  as  a 
metaphysical  doctrine  based  on  the  supposition  that  it  is 
impossible  to  conceive  of  an  absolute  standard  of  position  in 
space.  Such  an  impossibility  had  often  been  asserted  by 
writers  on  the  theory  of  mechanics,  but  it  was  quite  irrelevant 
to  Einstein's  hypothesis.  Physical  theory  has  nothing  to  do 
with  an  absolute  space.  The  space  with  which  it  deals  is  one 
aspect  of  the  relations  which  have  been  observed  between  the 
phenomena  with  which  that  theory  is  concerned. 

Newton  in  setting  out  his  scheme  of  dynamics  postulated 
an  absolute  standard  of  position  in  space  relative  to  which  all 
velocities  are  measured ;  such  a  beginning  was  suggested  by 
the  history  of  the  astronomical  problem  with  which  he  was 
dealing.  Copernicus  shifted  the  centre  of  the  universe  from  the 
earth  to  the  sun,  and  from  this  it  was  a  very  short  step  to  the 
assumption  that  the  sun  was  no  more  likely  to  be  an  absolute 
centre  than  the  earth.  Hence  the  assumption  of  an  unknown, 
though  still  definite,  criterion  of  position  in  space. 

But  when,  on  the  background  of  this  assumption,  the  science 
of  dynamics  had  been  developed,  it  was  found  that  the  laws 
which  had  been  framed  had  a  very  special  property.  If  they 
were  universally  satisfied,  there  was  no  means  of  determining 
the  actual  velocity  of  any  body,  though  the  relative  velocity  of 
two  bodies  was  determinate.  In  fact,  it  in  no  way  disturbs  the 

2 


I  NT  ROD  UCTOR  Y  3 

general  laws  of  dynamics  if  an  arbitrary  velocity  is  added  to 
the  velocity  of  every  body  in  the  system.  In  other  words,  the 
frame  of  reference  assumed  at  the  beginning  is  not  a  unique 
one,  but  may  be  any  one  of  an  infinite  number,  of  which  any 
one  has  relative  to  any  other  a  constant  velocity  of  translation 
without  rotation.  To  assert  that  a  unique  frame  of  reference 
can  never  be  found  is  perhaps  not  absolutely  proved,  but 
neither  is  any  scientific  hypothesis.  All  that  has  been  done  is 
that  the  hypothesis  has  been  put  on  such  a  footing  that  it 
seems  a  waste  of  time  to  endeavour  to  dispense  with  it. 

This  dynamical  relativity  is  a  very  different  thing  from  a 
statement  as  to  what  the  mind  is  able  to  conceive  about 
position  and  motion.  It  is  indeed  doubtful  whether  it  is 
possible  or  logical  to  think  about  either  of  these  entirely  apart 
from  the  regularities  perceived  in  the  motions  of  actual  bodies. 
In  any  case,  if  the  doctrine  of  the  relativity  of  all  motion  were 
#z£ta-physical,  it  would  have  to  extend  beyond  the  scope  of 
that  indicated  by  Newton's  laws  of  motion,  and  to  deny  the 
existence  of  any  criterion  of  a  fixed  direction  in  space  or  of  the 
validity  of  the  conception  of  a  constant  velocity.  It  would 
result  in  an  entirely  agnostic  position  about  motion  which 
would  have  to  be  superseded  whenever  it  was  desired  to  deal 
with  actual  facts  of  experience.  We  shall  see  later  that 
Einstein  has  in  his  later  work  been  able  to  show  that  the  facts, 
as  they  are  known  to  us,  are  as  a  matter  of  fact  entirely 
consistent  with  such  a  position. 

2.  The  limited  scope  of  the  relativity  arising  out  of  dyna- 
mical theory  has  always  been  rather  unsatisfying  to  the  mind, 
and  so  it  was  almost  with  a  sense  of  relief  that  the  rise  of  the 
electro-magnetic  theory  of  light,  bringing  with  it  the  suggestion 
of  a  universal  aether,  was  hailed  as  offering  a  possibility  of  a 
return  to  an  absolute  theory,  that  is,  to  one  in  which  a  velocity 
can  be  uniquely  assigned  to  every  body,  namely,  its  velocity 
relative  to  the  aether.  In  fact,  it  seemed  clear,  since  all 
astronomical  observations  are  made  by  optical  means,  that  the 
frame  of  reference  in  practice  must  be  actually  the  medium 
relative  to  which  light  is  propagated.  Thus  arose  the  attempt 
to  determine  the  velocity  of  the  earth  relative  to  the  aether. 


4          RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

Such  a  quest  has  of  course  no  meaning  apart  from  a  de- 
finite conception  of  the  aether.  In  the  first  instance  the  experi- 
ments were  rather  directed  towards  clearing  up  the  question  as 
to  what  was  the  best  way  to  think  of  the  aether,  whether  as  an- 
other variety  of  matter  filling  all  space  not  otherwise  occupied, 
or  as  a  medium  of  such  nature  that  it  could  penetrate  matter  and 
be  undisturbed  by  the  passage  of  matter  through  it.  It  was 
the  latter  way  of  thinking  of  it  toward  which  opinion  gradu- 
ally tended  and  which  had  been  almost  universally  adopted. 
It  is  perhaps  not  wise  to  make  a  definite  statement  as  to  why 
this  was  so,  but,  at  any  rate,  a  very  important  factor  was  the 
development  of  the  precise  statement  of  the  laws  of  electro- 
magnetic phenomena  as  initiated  by  Maxwell  and  elaborated 
in  the  electron  theory  of  Larmor  and  Lorentz. 

Just  as  the  enunciation  of  Newton's  laws  of  motion  gave 
a  meaning  to  the  notion  of  '  absolute  direction  '  which  before  it 
did  not  possess,  so  the  adoption  of  Maxwell's  equations,  as  ex- 
pressing the  laws  of  propagation  of  light  and  electro-magnetic 
disturbances,  gave  a  new  meaning  to  the  term  '  position  in 
space'  by  relating  it  to  the  medium  whose  properties  the 
equations  were  thought  to  embody.  We  must  remember, 
however,  that  this  medium  is  defined  only  by  these  same  pro- 
perties and  equations,  and  that  to  base  any  argument  on  an 
analogy  between  it  and  a  hypothetical  continuous  medium  of 
material  and  mechanical  properties  in  the  ordinary  sense — 
properties  which  have  not  been  shown  to  be  involved  in  the 
definition  of  the  aether — is  to  become  liable  to  finding  ourselves 
at  variance  with  the  facts.  The  aether  is,  in  truth,  nothing 
more  than  the  aggregate  of  the  functions  which  it  serves, 
though  we  find  it  difficult  to  think  of  it  except  in  some  concrete 
and  uniquely  existent  form ;  the  exact  form,  however,  which 
is  adopted  is  largely  determined  by  individual  preference  for 
this  or  that  analogy. 

3.  The  conception  of  the  'stagnant'  aether  having  been 
adopted,  it  came  as  a  great  surprise  that  all  experimental 
efforts  failed  to  find  a  physical  effect  due  to  the  motion  of 
bodies  through  it.  Theory  seemed  to  indicate  several  ways 
of  observing  such  an  effect.  The  failure  of  all  these  methods 


INTRODUCTORY  5 

necessitated  a  reconciliation  of  theory  and  experiment,  and 
such  a  reconciliation  was  rendered  possible  by  the  work  of 
Larmor  and  Lorentz  ;  if  not  complete  in  every  detail,  yet  it 
went  so  far  that  many  were  led  to  the  belief  that  not  only 
some  but  all  experiments  of  this  nature  were  foredoomed  to 
failure  (e.g.  Larmor,  Brit.  Ass.,  Belfast,  1902). 

To  admit  such  a  possibility  is  to  allow  that  the  aether, 
whatever  its  nature,  may  for  ever  remain  concealed.  This 
is  to  weaken  considerably  our  power  of  thinking  of  the  aether 
as  an  actually  existing  medium.  But  it  in  no  way  affects  the 
scheme  of  properties  which  it  was  intended  to  connote. 
Rather  in  the  hands  of  Lorentz  and  Larmor  it  becomes  a  con- 
firmation of  the  theory  to  find  that  the  experiments  actually 
do  fail.  But  it  is  hardly  true  to  say  that,  if  we  grant  the  hypo- 
thesis that  we  shall  never  be  able  to  identify  a  unique  frame  of 
reference  for  the  mathematical  theory,  then  we  deny  the  exist- 
ence of  a  real  medium  of  propagation  of  the  physical  effects  of 
light  and  electricity.  What  we  do  is  only  to  question  the 
sufficiency  of  the  existing  conceptions  of  the  nature  of  this 
medium,  and  the  validity  of  identifying  it  with  a  frame  of 
reference  which  experience  finds  to  be  far  from  definite. 

4.  If  the  dynamics  of  Newton  left  some  ambiguity  in  the 
meaning  of  space  relations  there  is  no  such  doubt  left  in  the 
case  of  time  intervals.  To  him  a  time  interval  was  so  definite 
that  he  was  able  to  speak  of  absolute  time  as  '  flowing  evenly 
on '  as  if  independent  of  all  phenomena.  One  of  the  funda- 
mental elements  in  this  idea  of  absolute  time  is  that  of  the 
'  simultaneity  of  events '  at  different  places.  No  ambiguity 
about  the  meaning  of  this  appears  to  have  arisen. 

But  if  we  grant  the  impossibility  of  determining  the 
velocity  of  the  earth  through  the  aether,  using  the  term  for  a 
moment  in  the  sense  of  the  frame  of  reference  for  the  propa- 
gation of  light,  this  idea  of  *  simultaneity '  becomes  as  vague  as 
that  of  the  velocity  of  a  moving  body.  If  we  consider  that 
the  science  of  astronomy  and  the  law  of  gravitation  are 
dependent  for  their  verification  on  optical  observations,  we 
shall  be  inclined  to  agree  that  so  far  at  any  rate  the  criterion 
of  simultaneity  which  has  been  used  in  practice  has  been  one 


6  RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

based  on  optical  communication.  Now  we  shall  see  later  that 
the  setting  up  of  a  standard  of  simultaneity  by  means  of  light 
signals  is  not  possible  until  a  definite  velocity  is  assigned  to 
the  observer.  Thus  the  hypothesis  of  relativity  requires  a 
reconsideration  of  the  way  in  which  we  measure  time. 

This  again  reacts  on  the  measurement  of  the  length  of  a 
material  body,  the  '  distance  between  two  points '  being  the 
distance  between  simultaneous  positions  of  those  points.  Thus 
it  becomes  necessary  also  to  re-examine  the  way  in  which  we 
measure  space.  It  becomes  impossible  to  consider  space  and 
time  separately ;  the  two  measures  are  inter-related  to  such 
an  extent  that  Minkowski  felt  himself  constrained  to  say  that 
"  from  henceforth  time  by  itself  and  space  by  itself  are  mere 
shadows,  that  they  are  only  two  aspects  of  a  single  and 
indivisible  manner  of  co-ordinating  the  facts  of  the  physical 
world".1 

5.  In  what  follows,  then,  we  have  to  consider  first  the  exact 
way  in  which  our  fundamental  notions  of  space,  time,  and 
motion  have  to  be  modified.  This  will  lead  us  on  to  a  state- 
ment of  the  status  assigned  to  dynamical  theory  according  to 
the  principle  of  relativity,  and  in  particular  will  require  a  discus- 
sion of  the  ideas  of  momentum  and  energy.  It  is  well  known 
that  the  idea  of  a  constant  mass  for  every  body  has  to  be 
modified  if  we  take  into  account  the  effects  of  radiation  and 
electrical  constitution.  We  shall  see  that  we  can  draw,  from 
the  general  Principle  of  Relativity,  some  very  important  con- 
clusions as  to  the  mechanical  relations  of  systems,  without 
having  recourse  to  any  particular  theory  of  the  nature  of  an 
electron  or  of  the  way  in  which  matter  is  built  up  out  of  them. 
Our  growing  sense  of  the  insufficiency  of  fhe  existing  pictures 
of  the  constitution  of  matter  makes  this  a  very  important 
consideration. 

The  following  out  in  detail  of  the  consequences  of  Einstein's 
work  of  1905,  should  by  loosening  our  hold  on  the  Newtonian 
methods  of  thought,  so  deeply  ingrained,  make  it  easier  to  take 
the  further  step  to  the  appreciation  of  the  much  more  general 
and  satisfying  position  which  underlies  Einstein's  more  recent 

1  Raum  und  Zeit,  Leipzig,  1909. 


INTRODUCTORY  7 

work.  To  this  we  shall  return  later.  For  the  moment,  we 
can  but  record  the  fact,  that,  setting  out  to  examine  the 
objection  of  the  philosopher  to  the  extremely  limited  scope  of 
his  so-called  Principle  of  Relativity,  he  not  only  was  able  to 
satisfy  the  philosopher,  but  at  the  same  time  to  explain  facts 
which  had  refused  to  bow  to  Newtonian  dynamics,  and  to  lead 
to  the  entirely  new  discovery  that  rays  of  light  are  bent  by 
gravitation.  To  this  we  shall  come  in  Part  II. 


PART  I. 

THE  SPECIAL  PRINCIPLE  OF  RELATIVITY. 

CHAPTER   II. 
THE   ORIGIN    OF   THE   PRINCIPLE. 

6.  SPACE  AND  TIME  IN  NEWTON'S  DYNAMICS. 

IN  order  to  appreciate  the  full  significance  of  the  new  point  of 
view  introduced  by  Einstein  in  1905  with  the  technical  name, 
"  The  Principle  of  Relativity  "  now  more  precisely  called  "  The 
Special  Principle  of  Relativity,"  it  is  desirable  to  make  a 
survey  of  the  previous  lines  of  thought. 

Newton  planted  deeply  in  scientific  thought  the  ideas  of 
an  absolute  position  in  space  and  of  an  absolute  time.  The 
significance  of  the  Copernican  revolution  in  astronomy  extends 
beyond  the  moving  of  the  origin  of  reference  from  the  observer 
to  the  sun.  It  makes  it  impossible  to  think  even  of  the  sun 
as  a  permanent  and  ultimate  point  of  reference.  We  naturally 
go  on  to  think  of  the  sun  as  one  member  of  a  system  greater 
than  the  solar  system,  and  we  can  see  no  end  to  the  process 
of  shifting  the  point  of  reference.  We  have  no  conception  of 
the  actual  velocity  of  the  earth  or  of  the  sun  in  space.  But 
the  precise  scheme  of  laws  set  forth  by  Newton  introduced  an 
absolute  element  into  our  conceptions  of  celestial  motions.  In 
the  light  of  his  laws  we  perceive  that  the  reason  that  we  are 
able  over  a  large  range  of  terrestrial  phenomena  to  treat  the 
earth  as  the  point  of  reference  and  to  ignore  the  remainder  of  the 
universe,  is  just  that  we  may  think  of  the  earth's  absolute  velocity 
as  changing  very  slowly.  Similarly,  the  reason  that  a  theory 
of  the  solar  system  as  a  separate  system  is  possible,  ignoring 

8 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  PRINCIPLE  g 

the  whole  of  the  rest  of  the  universe,  is  that  we  may  conceive 
of  its  centre  of  mass  as  having  a  constant  absolute  velocity. 

Although  later  we  find  that  the  '  absolute  velocity '  of  a  body 
is  not  determinable,  yet  the  classical  dynamics  do  give  us  a 
criterion  of  something  which  we  may  call  'absolute  direction,' 
though  the  philosopher  may  assert  that  we  are  not  using  the  term 
in  a  strict  sense.  In  the  sense  in  which  we  use  the  term  this 
absolute  direction  is  not  a  thing  that  is  obvious  a  priori,  arising 
out  of  pure  thought ;  it  is  a  fact  which  emerges  out  of  the 
perceived  motions  of  bodies  as  we  try  to  reduce  them  to  the 
simplest  possible  descriptive  scheme.  The  scientific  concep- 
tion of  space  is  inseparable  from  the  laws  of  physics.  There 
is  no  other  way  of  making  space  an  object  of  measurement 
save  by  means  of  this  body  of  law.  Apart  from  it  or  from 
some  equivalent,  motion  is  a  mere  sensation,  though  it  is 
doubtful  whether  the  most  primitive  man  is  without  some 
rudimentary  notion  of  those  regularities  which  have  been 
summed  up  in  the  law  of  inertia. 

7.  THE  RELATIVITY  OF  NEWTON'S  DYNAMICS. 

But  now  we  come  to  the  remarkable  fact  that  the  absolute- 
ness introduced  into  our  ideas  of  space  by  the  laws  of  dynamics 
is  only  partial.  It  is  a  commonplace  that  if  any  frame  of  re- 
ference is  known  with  respect  to  which  the  laws  of  motion  are 
satisfied  then  any  other  frame  which  is  moving  relative  to 
that  known  frame  with  a  constant  velocity  as  judged  by  the 
standards  of  dynamics,  is  equally  suitable  as  a  basis  for  the 
description  of  the  motion  by  the  same  laws. 

This  partial  relativity  it  will  be  convenient  to  speak  of  as 
'  Newtonian  Relativity '.  It  is  not  a  philosophic  principle,  it 
is  purely  empirical,  arid  rests  for  its  justification  on  the  agree- 
ment of  the  deductions  from  it  with  the  facts  of  observation. 
Thus  from  this  point  of  view  we  have  no  criterion  whereby  we 
may  say  in  any  defined  sense  that  a  given  point  is  at  rest  in  space. 

A  similar  position  is  to  be  taken  as  to  the  nature  of  time 
as  an  object  of  measurement.  There  may  or  may  not  be  an 
a  priori  standard  of  the  equality  of  two  elements  of  duration, 
but  we  do  not  know  what  it  may  be.  For  scientific  purposes 


io         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

of  exact  measurement  the  time  of  which  we  think  is  defined 
by  the  laws  of  motion.  There  is  no  real  need  to  say  with 
Newton  that  "  absolute  time  flows  uniformly  on,"  and  to 
pretend  that,  given  this  time,  we  lay  our  phenomena  of  motion 
in  thought  against  it  and  so  measure  them.  We  cannot  doubt 
that  the  definition  of  time  was  invented  after  the  system  of 
dynamics  had  been  worked  out,  and  was  prefixed  to  satisfy 
the  demand  for  definitions  and  postulates  at  the  beginning  of 
any  systematic  treatise. 

8.  TIME  NOT  AN  ABSOLUTE  OR  INDEPENDENT  CONCEPT. 

Time,  then,  as  an  object  of  measurement  is  nothing  more 
than  one  aspect  of  the  relations  which  we  have  been  able  to 
disentangle  from  the  complex  of  phenomena  of  motion.  But 
to  our  everyday  life  it  is  such  a  definite  aspect  that  it  seems 
to  exist  almost  in  its  own  right.  The  partial  relativity  that 
exists  in  the  scheme  of  relations  leaves  no  ambiguity  in  the 
term  'equality  of  two  intervals  of  time'  nor  in  the  term 
*  equality  of  two  distances '.  These  are  such  definite  and 
separable  elements  in  the  construction  of  the  scheme  that  it  is 
possible  to  reconstruct  the  idea  of  the  measurement  of  motion 
out  of  them.  The  Newtonian  picture  of  the  motions  of  bodies 
is  the  perfected  result  of  a  long  process  of  analysis  of  percept- 
ions and  refinement  of  concepts.  Beginning  with  the  crude 
perception  of  change,  the  continual  comparison  of  motions 
results  in  the  extraction  of  the  conceptual  time  and  space  of 
mathematics.  In  terms  of  these  we  are  able  to  build  up  a 
mental  model  of  the  motion  which  is  susceptible  to  mathe- 
matical treatment.  This  model  is  only  approximate,  since  it 
necessarily  ignores  certain  factors  in  the  actual  system.  Our 
planetary  theory,  for  instance,  disregards  the  effect  of  the 
distant  stars,  and  the  neglect  is  justified  a  posteriori  by  the  fact 
that  the  discrepancy  between  model  and  system  is  incapable 
of  observation. 

9.  MATHEMATICAL  FORM  OF  THE  NEWTONIAN 

PRINCIPLE  OF  RELATIVITY. 

Before  proceeding  further,  it  will  be  useful  to  set  down  in 
mathematical  form  the  chief  aspects  of 'Newtonian  Relativity'. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  PRINCIPLE  1 1 

(i)  The  Space-Time  Transformations. — Let  (x, y,  z)  be  a  set 
of  space  co-ordinates  and  /an  associated  time  variable,  defining 
together  a  Newtonian  frame  of  reference — that  is,  which  are 
such  that  if  the  motion  is  described  by  the  use  of  these 
variables,  the  laws  of  motion  are  satisfied  Let  a  new  set  of 
variables  be  taken,  defined  by  the  equations 

x  =  x  -  at,  y  =  y  -  fit,  z  =  z  -  7*,  f  =  t. 
Now  let  the  motion  be  described  by  turning  the  given  relations 
between  (#, y,z\  and  t  into  relations  between  (x\ y\  z'}  and  /, 
then  the  relations  so  obtained  between  (xt  y ',  z)  and  /  will 
also  satisfy  the  laws  of  motion ;  in  other  words,  the  new 
variables  also  define  a  Newtonian  frame  of  reference. 

A  point  which  as  measured  in  the  first  set  of  co-ordinates 
has  the  velocity  (u,  v,  w)  has  in  the  second  the  velocity  (u  -  a, 
v  —  /3,  w  —  7),  and  the  relative  velocity  of  two  points  is  the 
same  in  both  systems,  a,  /3,  7  being  given  constants. 

(ii)  The  Law  of  Addition  of  Velocities. — The  relations 

u    =  u  -  a,  v    =  v  -  /?,  w   =  w  -  7 

connecting  the  velocities  of  a  given  point  relative  to  two  New- 
tonian frames  of  reference,  of  which  the  origin  of  the  second 
has  a  velocity  (a,  /Q,  7)  relative  to  the  first,  seem  to  us  to  be 
obvious  relations  ;  but  it  is  necessary  to  remember  that  the  fact 
that  either  (uy  v,  w)  or  (u,  v,  w)  may  be  conveniently  called 
the  velocity  of  the  body  in  the  appropriate  frame  of  reference 
depends  upon  what  has  been  said  of  the  possibility  of  main- 
taining unchanged  the  form  of  the  dynamical  laws  when  we 
change  the  frame  of  reference.  We  shall  see  later  that  these 
relations  cease  to  be  convenient  when  we  are  dealing  with  the 
extremely  great  velocities  which  we  associate  with  the  nega- 
tive electrons  constituting  the  cathode  and  /3-rays. 

(iii)  Newtonian  Relativity  consists  in  the  fact  that  either 
(x,  y,  z,  f)  or  (x,  /,  z\  /)  are  equally  valid  as  space-time  co- 
ordinates, and  (u,  v,  w)  or  (u,  v,  w'}  as  the  corresponding 
measures  of  velocity.  But  there  are  certain  quantities  which 
are  '  invariants/  that  is,  which  have  the  same  value  which- 
ever set  of  co-ordinates  we  employ.  These  are — to  mention  the 
most  simple — the  '  mass '  of  a  particle,  the  '  force  '  acting  upon 


12         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

a  particle,  and  the  '  acceleration  '  of  a  particle.  When  we  come 
to  higher  dynamics,  we  find  that  the  '  constants  of  inertia  '  of  a 
rigid  body  and  other  quantities  have  invariant  values,  whereas 
the  '  energy  '  of  a  system  is  a  relative  quantity  though  the  '  prin- 
ciple of  the  conservation  of  energy  '  is  an  invariant  relation. 

10.  THE    PRINCIPLE    OF    CONSERVATION    OF    MOMENTUM 
DEDUCIBLE  FROM  THE   PRINCIPLES  OF  CONSERVA- 

TION  OF  ENERGY  AND  OF   RELATIVITY. 

If  we  assume   that  the  principle  of  the  conservation  of 
energy  in  the  form 

'  rate  of  increase  of  kinetic  energy  =  rate  of  work  of  forces  ' 
is  true  whatever  Newtonian  frame  of  reference  we  use,  we  may 
deduce  the  principle  that 

*  rate  of  increase  of  momentum  in  any  direction  —  sum  of  forces 
in  that  direction  '  . 

For,  whatever  the  values  of  the  constants  a,  ft,  7,  we  must 

^m{(u  -  of  +  (v  -  /3)2  +  (w  -  7)2} 

=  2{X(«  -  a)  +  Y(z,  -  £)  +  Z(w  -  7)}, 
m  being  the  mass  of  a  particle  of  the  system,  and  (X,  Y,  Z) 
being  the  components  of  any  force  applied  to  the  system. 
Hence 

>.  du       ,  dv       , 


=  2  {X(«  -  a)  +  Y(v  -  £)  +  Z(w  -  7}, 
whatever  the  values  of  a,  /3,  7. 

Hence  the  coefficients  of  a,  /3,  7  separately  must  be  equal 
on  the  two  sides  of  the  equation  :  or 
^     du       Vv 

*m  Tt  =  2X 


^      dw       ^^ 
2m  —  --  2Z, 

which  equations  express  exactly  the    ordinary    principle    of 
momentum. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  PRINCIPLE  13 

Exactly  a  similar  relation  between  the  three  principles  of 
momentum,  energy,  and  relativity  is  maintained  in  Einstein's 
Special  Principle  of  Relativity  (1905)  which  is  to  be  developed 
later. 

ii.  THE  ADVENT  OF  AETHER  THEORY. 

It  is  on  the  basis  of  time  and  space  as  described  above 
that  subsequent  physical  thought  has  rested.  All  motion  has 
been  tacitly  referred  to  a  Newtonian  frame  of  reference.  But 
the  nineteenth  century  began  a  new  era.  Early  in  that  cen- 
tury the  idea  of  a  luminiferous  aether  came  into  prominence. 
The  question  was  at  once  asked,  "  What  is  the  velocity  of  the 
earth  relative  to  this  medium  ?  " 

Arago,  sometime  before  iSiS,1  devised  an  experiment 
which  he  thought  would  answer  that  question.  On  the  wave 
theory  of  light  the  index  of  refraction  of  a  piece  of  glass  is  the 
ratio  of  the  velocity  of  the  incident  light  to  the  velocity  of  the 
refracted  light.  If  the  glass  were  moving  through  the  aether 
to  meet  the  incident  light,  the  relative  velocity  of  the  light  at 
entering  the  prism  would  be  greater  than  if  the  prism  were  at 
rest  in  the  aether.  The  velocity  of  the  light  in  the  prism 
should,  however,  be  the  same,  so  Arago  thought.  Thus  the 
index  of  refraction  and  therefore  the  deviation  of  the  ray  of 
light,  should  be  greater  when  the  prism  is  moving  towards  the 
ray  than  when  it  is  moving  away  from  the  ray  or  is  at  rest  in 
the  aether.  It  was  such  a  difference  in  the  deviation  that 
Arago  hoped  to  find  when  he  examined  rays  of  light  from 
stars  in  different  directions,  all  of  which  could  not  make  the 
same  angle  with  the  motion  of  the  earth  through  the  aether. 
The  difference  corresponding  to  a  velocity  of  the  earth  equal 
to  its  velocity  relative  to  the  sun  would  have  amounted  to 
about  one  minute  of  angle,  and  this  was  well  within  the  reach 
of  his  means  of  observation,  so  that  he  expected  to  perceive  a 
measurable  difference  ;  but  he  did  not.  Writing  to  Fresnel  for 
an  opinion  on  his  experiments,  he  was  told  that  the  only  place  at 
which  his  argument  might  break  down  was  in  the  assumption 

1  See  the  letter  from  Fresnel  to  Arago  on  the  subject  of  the   experiments 
"  Annales  de  Chimie,"  1818. 


14         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

that  the  light  travelled  through  the  prism  at  the  same  relative 
rate  whether  the  prism  was  moving  or  at  rest  in  the  aether. 
Fresnel  suggested  that  the  prism  did  not  communicate  to  the 
light  the  whole  of  its  velocity  but  only  a  fraction  of  it.  If  u 
were  the  velocity  of  the  light  in  the  prism  when  at  rest  in  the 
aether,  and  the  prism  were  set  in  motion  with  velocity  v  relative 
to  the  aether,  then  Fresnel  asserted  that  the  deviation  would 
not  be  altered  at  all,  if  the  velocity  of  the  light  relative  to  the 
prism  were  now  (u  -  v/jj,2),  fj,  being  the  ordinary  index  of  re- 
fraction ;  or,  in  other  words,  if  the  prism  communicated  to  the 
ray  not  its  whole  velocity  but  only  the  fraction  (l  -  I///,2)  of  it. 
This  fraction  is  now  commonly  spoken  of  as  *  Fresnel's 
convection-coefficient  \1 

12.  MATTER  MODIFIED  BY  ITS  MOTION  THROUGH  THE 

AETHER. 

The  point  of  Fresnel's  suggestion  which  is  of  most  signi- 
ficance for  us  here  is  that  it  implies  that  matter,  by  its  motion 
through  the  aether,  may  be  modified  in  just  such  a  way  as  to 
neutralize  an  effect  which  would  otherwise  arise.  We  shall 
see  later  several  more  instances  of  hypotheses  that  have  been 
suggested  for  the  purpose  of  explaining  the  non-appearance  of 
effects  to  which  theory  seemed  to  point.  It  was  one  of  the 
main  objects  of  the  1905  Principle  of  Relativity  to  gather 
together  these  separate  ad  hoc  hypotheses  under  a  single 
assumption,  and  to  deduce  consequences  which  do  not  arise 
out  of  the  particular  and  disconnected  hypotheses. 

13.  FIZEAU'S  VERIFICATION  OF  FRESNEL'S  HYPOTHESIS. 
In  1851  Fizeau  set  out  to  verify  directly  Fresnel's  sugges- 
tion of  a  convection-coefficient  by  actually  observing  the  effect 
of  the  motion  of,  a  stream  of  water  on  the  velocity  of  light 
through  it.     He  devised  an  experiment  in  which  a  beam  of 
light  is  divided  into  two  parts  which  traverse  two  parallel  tubes 
filled  with  water  which  can  be  set  in  motion  with  a  measur- 
able velocity.     A  beam  of  light  from  the  source  a  (Fig.  I) 

1  Larmor,  "  £Sther  and  Matter,"  1900,  p.  38,  shows  that  Fresnel's  hypo- 
thesis is  not  only  sufficient  but  is  necessary  if  Arago's  experimental  evidence  is 
universally  confirmed. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  PRINCIPLE  15 

rendered  parallel  by  the  lens  b  is  divided  into  two  parts  by  the 
half-silvered  plate  c.  The  two  parts  are  reflected  by  the 
mirrors  d  into  the  two  tubes  AB,  CD  which  contain  the  water, 
and  are  sent  back  through  the  opposite  tube  by  the  totally 
reflecting  prism/;  they  are  then  reunited  by  the  mirrors  d  and 
the  plate  c  and  enter  the  telescope  g,  through  which  inter- 
ference fringes  are  observed. 


d 


FIG  i. — Fizeau's  apparatus  as  improved  by  Michelson  and  Morley. 

Explanation  of  Diagram. — a,  source  of  light ;  b,  condensing  lens;  c,  half-silvered 
plate  of  glass  to  divide  the  beam  of  light ;  d,  d,  mirrors  ;  e,  e,  tubes  carrying 
stream  of  water  in  opposite  directions ;  /,  totally  reflecting  prism ;  g,  ob- 
serving telescope. 

The  water  in  the  tubes  is  then  caused  to  circulate,  moving 
in  opposite  directions  along  AB  and  CD,  so  that  it  is  moving 
with  one  part  of  the  beam  of  light  and  against  the  other.  A 
shifting  of  the  interference  fringes  is  at  once  observed,  which 
is  proportional  to  the  velocity  of  the  water. 

Supposing  that  the  velocity  of  light  through  the  moving 
water  is  c  +  kv,  where  c  is  the  velocity  when  the  velocity  v  is 
zero,  the  times  taken  by  the  two  parts  of  the  beam  to  traverse 
the  total  path  /  in  the  water  are  respectively 


the   velocity   v  being  in  opposite  senses  for  the  two  parts. 


1 6         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

Thus  the  retardation  of  the  one  beam  relative  to  the  other  is 

/  /  2lkv 

c  -  kv        c '  +  kv          c'2 
neglecting  (v/c)*. 

On  measuring  the  displacement  of  the  interference  fringes, 
Fizeau  found  that  Fresnel's  value  for  the  convection-coeffici- 
ent k,  viz.  I  -  fju  -  2,  fitted  his  results  quite  well.  The  con- 
clusion was  confirmed  later  by  Michelson  and  Morley,  who  re- 
peated the  experiment  with  modern  refinements.  The  detailed 
discussion  of  Michelson  and  Morley's  results  will  be  referred  to 
later  (p.  41,  §§  36-8).  It  will  be  seen  that  they  are  entirely  in 
agreement  with  the  predictions  of  the  principle  of  relativity. 

14.    THE    SIGNIFICANCE    OF    FRESNEL'S    CONVECTION-CO- 
EFFICIENT, AND  OF   FlZEAU'S  VERIFICATION   OF   IT. 

The  remarkable  experimental  verification  of  Fresnel's  bril- 
liant guess  considerably  strengthened  the  tendency  towards 
the  "stagnant  aether"  theory.  It  might  have  seemed  that  the 
hypothesis  was  a  very  artificial  one,  but  we  must  admit  that 
Fresnel's  preference  for  this  conception  was  not  without  reason. 
To  quote  his  own  words  : — 

"  If  we  admitted  that  our  globe  communicates  its  velocity 
to  the  aether  which  surrounds  it,  it  would  be  easy  to  see  why 
the  same  prism  refracts  light  in  the  same  manner  from  what- 
ever direction  it  comes.  But  it  seems  impossible  to  explain 
the  aberration  of  the  stars  on  this  hypothesis ;  so  far  I  have 
not  been  able  to  think  clearly  of  this  phenomenon  except  by 
supposing  that  the  aether  passes  freely  through  the  earth,  and 
that  the  velocity  given  to  this  subtle  fluid  is  only  a  very  small 
part  of  that  of  the  earth ;  not  more  than  one  hundredth  part, 
for  example." 

The  outstanding  fact  of  aberration  must,  indeed,  not  be 
forgotten  in  considering  the  various  experiments  and  hypo- 
theses that  have  been  devised  to  meet  the  various  questions 
that  arise. 

Sir  George  Stokes,  a  great  student  of  the  motion  of  fluids, 
tried  hard  to  evolve  a  theory  of  the  aether  which  would  allow 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  PRINCIPLE  17 

of  it  being  dragged  along  with  the  earth,  and  at  the  same  time 
be  consistent  with  the  law  of  aberration.  But  his  theory  never 
received  a  large  amount  of  support,  and  was  practically  aban- 
doned when  the  establishment  of  the  identity  of  light  and 
electric  disturbances  required  that  the  aether  should  be  con- 
ceived as  much  in  relation  to  electro-magnetic  phenomena  as 
to  optical.  But  the  immediate  significance  of  Fizeau's  ex- 
periment was  that  it  was  thereby  definitely  shown  that  the 
velocity  of  light  relative  to  a  material  medium  is  not  a  con- 
stant depending  on  the  nature  of  the  medium  alone,  but  is 
also  dependent  on  the  velocity  of  the  medium  through  space, 
or  rather  through  the  aether,  which  was  conceived  by  Fresnel 
to  be  at  rest  in  space. 

The  effect  being  a  first  order  one,  that  is,  being  propor- 
tional to  the  first  power  of  the  velocity,  the  experiment  throws 
no  light  on  the  velocity  of  the  earth  itself,  since  the  part  of 
the  effect  due  to  this  velocity  remains  practically  constant,  the 
observed  effect  being  proportional  to  the  change  in  the  velo- 
city of  the  water  in  the  tubes  relative  to  the  earth.  But 
henceforth  it  was  clear  that  in  respect  of  its  optical  properties 
it  must  be  admitted  that  a  material  medium  is  in  some  sense 
modified  by  its  motion. 

When  at  a  later  date  light  was  identified  as  an  electro- 
magnetic disturbance  this  became  one  deciding  factor  as  be- 
tween Hertz'  theory  of  electro-magnetic  phenomena  in  moving 
bodies,  and  that  of  Maxwell  and  Lorentz.  Hertz'  idea  of  a 
moving  body  was  just  an  extension  of  the  Newtonian  idea  of 
a  rigid  body  in  motion.  The  properties  of  the  body  were  con- 
ceived by  him  to  be  entirely  unchanged  when  it  was  set  in 
motion,  just  as  the  dynamical  mass  of  a  body  was  unaltered ; 
and  among  other  implications  was  the  complete  convection 
of  light,  that  is,  the  invariance  of  the  velocity  of  light  relative 
to  the  body.  In  view  of  Fizeau's  experiment  it  was  not  pos- 
sible to  maintain  this  theory,  and  other  experiments  soon 
showed  it  to  be  lacking  in  other  respects. 

Fresnel's  suggestion  of  the  interpenetration  of  aether  and 
matter  therefore  assumed  greater  prominence,  and  became  the 
basis  of  the  later  theory  developed  by  Lorentz  and  by  Larmor. 

2 


i8 


RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 


15.  THE  MICHELSON-MORLEY  EXPERIMENT. 

The  question  was,  however,  by  no  means  regarded  as 
settled  by  Fizeau's  results.  In  1881  we  find  A.  A.  Michelson 
returning  to  it  with  an  attempt  at  a  direct  investigation  of  the 
difference  in  the  velocity  of  light  relative  to  the  earth  in  dif- 
ferent directions  by  a  method  which  did  not  involve  propaga- 
tion through  material  bodies.  It  was  hoped  thus  to  prevent 
the  possibility  of  an  explanation  of  the  results  by  means  of 
hypotheses  about  the  modification  of  matter  by  its  motion 
through  the  aether  such  as  Fresnel  had  advanced  in  the  case 
of  Arago's  experiment.  The  result  of  this  experiment  on 
subsequent  thought  was  so  far-reaching  that  it  will  be  well  to 
describe  it  in  detail. 

The  experiment  was  first  carried  out  by  Michelson  in 
1 88 1,  and  was  repeated  with  greater  refinement  with  the 
assistance  of  E.  W.  Morley1  in  1887,  and  again  with  even 
greater  care  by  Morley  and  D.  B.  Miller  in  I9O5.2 

Fizeau's  experiment,  as  has  been  pointed  out,  being  a  first 
order  experiment,  would  only  reveal  the  influence  of  velocity 
relative  to  the  earth.  In  the  Michelson- Morley  experiment 
it  was  proposed  to  seek  for  an  effect  depending  on  the 

square  of  the  velocity,  and  to 
avoid  any  question  concerning 
the  internal  constitution  of 
moving  matter.  The  arrange- 
M2  ment  was  as  follows,  the  figure 
showing  the  path  of  the  light 
relative  to  the  moving  ap- 
paratus : — 

A  beam  of  light  from  a 
source  S  was  divided  by 
partial  reflection  at  a  plate  of  glass  A  into  two  portions 
travelling  along  the  paths  AMX,  AM2.  These  two  portions 
were  reflected  back  by  mirrors  Mj  and  M2,  and,  on  striking 
the  plate  again,  a  portion  of  the  beam  from  M1  is  transmitted 
and  brought  to  interference  with  a  portion  of  the  beam  from 


C 

FIG.  2. 


Phil.  Mag.,"  1887. 


2  Ibid.,  1905. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  PRINCIPLE  19 

M2  reflected  along  AC.     The  whole  apparatus  could  be  rotated 
into  any  position  desired. 

1  6.  THE  THEORY  OF  THE  EXPERIMENT. 

Suppose  first  that  AM2  is  in  the  direction  of  the  earth's 
velocity  relative  to  the  aether,  which  will  be  called  v.  Then 
since  (c  -  v)  is  the  velocity  of  light  relative  to  the  apparatus 
on  the  forward  journey  and  (c  +  v}  is  the  relative  velocity  on 
the  return  journey,  the  time  taken  by  the  light  to  travel  from 
A  to  M2  and  back  is 


C  -   V         C  +  V          <     -   V 

where  /2  is  the  distance  AM2. 

In  considering  the  time  taken  to  go  to  Mj  and  back  we 
have  to  take  a  ray  whose  velocity  relative  to  the  apparatus  is 
along  AMj,  which  is  assumed  perpendicular  to  AM2.  The 
relative  velocity  along  this  line  will  thus  be  (&  -  z>2)*,  and  the 
time  taken  is  therefore 


where  /x  is  the  distance  AMr 

Thus  the  retardation  in  time  of  the  former  beam  relative 
to  the  latter  when  they  are  brought  together  again  is 


i        O  *>  X      O 

L^2  -  v1       (c2  - 
If  the  apparatus  is  now  rotated  so  that  AMj  comes  into 
the  direction  of  the  light,  ^  and  /2  change  places,  and  the 
retardation  is  altered  to 


Thus  the  change  in  the  retardation  is 

2^+H^-(^W 


& 

17.  ALTERNATIVE  EXPLANATION. 

The  following  explanation,  alternative  to  that  given  above,  together 
with  fig.  3  which  illustrates  the  absolute  path  of  the  rays  which  interfere, 
may  perhaps  make  the  theory  of  the  experiment  a  little  clearer. 

2* 


20        RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 


At  a  certain  moment  t3  let  A3  be  the  position  of  the  moving  plate 
and  let  us  consider  the  paths  of  the  two  parts  of  the  beam  which  are 
reunited  at  that  moment.  Let  Aj  be  the  position  of  the  plate  at  the 
instant  A  at  which  that  element  of  disturbance  leaves  Aj  which,  travelling 
by  the  path  A1M1A3,  arrives  at  A3  at  time  /3.  Then  the  time  t\  is  found 
thus:— 

AA.  =  v(fs  - 
+ 


giving 
or 


c 

FIG.  3. 

In  the  same  way  let  A2  be  the  position  of  the  plate  at  the  moment 
/2  of  the  emission  of  the  element  of  disturbance  which,  travelling  by  the 
path  A.iM2A3,  arrives  at  A3  at  time  /3. 

Then  A3A2  =  i/(/3  -  /2), 

A2M2  =  C(T  -  /2), 
M2A3  =  c(t%  -  r), 

where  r  is  the  moment  of  reflection. 

Also  /2  is  the  distance  of  M2  from  the  position  of  the  plate  at  time  T. 

Thifs  : —  /2  —  A2M2  -  v(r  -  4) 

=  (c  _  ^)  (r  _  /2), 

and  similarly  /3  =  (c  +  v)  (tz  -  r), 


gvng 


C  -  V 


/2      ^t_t 
+  "v 


or 


-   V* 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  PRINCIPLE 


21 


Thus  the  disturbances  which  are  united  at  A3  at  time  /3  do  not  leave 
the  plate  A  simultaneously,  but  at  instants  separated  by  an  interval 


(^  -  -z/2)         c*  -  V* 

and  therefore  will  differ  in  phase  by  this  amount,  exactly  as  obtained  above. 
The  question  to  be  answered  by  the  experiment  is  whether  this  difference 
of  phase  will  be  altered  when  the  apparatus  is  turned  round. 

Looking  at  the  theory  from  this  point  of  view  it  becomes  necessary  to 
consider  whether  the  directions  of  the  reunited  parts  of  the  beam  will 
necessarily  be  the  same.  This  involves  the  question  of  the  reflection  of 
a  ray  of  light  at  a  moving  mirror.  Let  us  consider  this  by  means  of 
Huygens'  principle. 

Let  AB  be  a  reflector  placed  at  any  angle  a  with  SS',  and  moving  with 
velocity  v  in  the  direction  SS'.  Let  AX  be  a  plane  wave-front  incident 
on  the  mirror  at  A  at  a  certain  instant ;  at  a  small  time  r  later,  the  un- 
reflected  portion  of  this  will  have  advanced  a  distance  CT,  being  now  part 
of  the  line  X'N.  In  the  same  time  the  reflector  has  advanced  a  distance 
AA'  =  vr  ;  so  that,  drawing  A'B'  parallel 
to  AB  to  meet  X'N  in  C,  C  is  now  the 
point  of  incidence  of  the  wave-front  on 
the  reflector.  Thus  the  reflection  is 
exactly  that  which  would  take  place  at 
a  fixed  mirror  in  the  position  AC. 

In  the  same  way,  considering  a 
ray  incident  on  the  other  side  of  AB, 
moving  in  the  opposite  direction,  we 
find  that  A'C'  is  the  direction  of  the 
equivalent  fixed  mirror. 

Thus  if  the  mirror  is  set  at  an 
angle  of  45°  with  AS'  the  direction  of  the 
reflected  part  of  the  beam  at  the  first 
incidence  will  be  AMi  where  the  angle 

XAMX  =  zC'AC, 

and  the  direction  of  the  transmitted  ray  after  its  final  reflection  will  be 
A'Z  where 

YA'Z  =  2C'A'C. 
The  condition  that  the  reunited  rays  shall  be  parallel  is  that 

XAMj  =  YA'Z, 

that  is  that  CAC'  =  C'A'C, 

and  this  is  satisfied  since  the  right-angled  triangle  ANC'  is  isosceles. 

1 8.  THE  RESULT  OF  THE  EXPERIMENT. 
Interpreted  according  to  this  calculation,  if  the  velocity  of 


22         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

the  earth  relative  to  the  aether  had  been  as  much  as  a  quarter  of 
the  velocity  of  the  earth  in  its  orbit,  there  would  have  been  a 
displacement  of  the  fringes  produced  by  the  interference  of 
the  two  beams  of  such  magnitude  that  it  could  not  have 
escaped  observation  with  the  apparatus  used.  But  no  trace 
of  such  a  displacement  was  found. 

Morley  and  Miller,  repeating  the  experiment  in  1905,  with 
still  greater  refinement,  also  came  to  the  conclusion  that  there 
was  no  displacement,  though  they  could  have  observed  one 
due  to  one-tenth  of  the  velocity  of  the  earth. 

19.    THE   FlTZGERALD-LORENTZ   CONTRACTION. 

If,  as  we  seem  bound  to,  we  accept  the  above  results  as 
showing  the  theory  which  has  been  given  to  be  inadequate, 
the  hope  of  determining  v  by  this  means  vanishes,  and  the 
difficulty  remains  of  reconciling  the  null  result  with  the  hypo- 
thesis of  an  aether  which  is  not  convected  along  with  the  optical 
system  by  the  earth. 

FitzGerald  l  threw  out  a  suggestion  that  if  the  aether  can 
percolate  through  matter,  it  may  affect  the  apparatus,  and 
change  its  dimensions  when  it  is  rotated.  Such  a  suggestion 
had  become  feasible  in  view  of  the  adoption  of  the  electro- 
magnetic theory  of  light,  and  the  growing  knowledge  of  the 
electrical  relations  of  matter.2 

If  such  an  effect  is  to  nullify  the  change  in  the  retardation, 
we  must  have,  if  /'p  /'2  are  the  changed  lengths  of  AMX,  AM2, 


This  is  satisfied  if 


that  is,  if  either  arm  contracts  in  the  ratio  I  :  (i  -  vl\c^  when 
turned  into  the  direction  of  motion,  as  compared  with  its 
length  when  at  right  angles  to  this  direction. 

iSee  O.  Lodge,  "Aberration  Problems,"  "Phil.  Trans.,"  184*  (1893),  P. 
727 ;  also  Presidential  Address  to  the  British  Association,  1913. 

2  E.g.  Maxwell's  law  connecting  the  index  of  refraction  with  the  dielectric 
constant. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  PRINCIPLE  23 

FitzGerald's  suggestion  was  not  carried  further  at  the  time, 
and  it  was  left  to  Lorentz  to  make  it  indendently,1  and  to 
show  at  the  same  time  some  plausible  reason  why  a  contrac- 
tion of  exactly  this  amount  might  be  expected. 

The  theory  to  which  Lorentz  was  led  in  his  investigations 
into  the  optical  behaviour  of  moving  bodies  is  so  fundamental 
to  the  present  subject,  and  is,  if  not  always  in  its  original 
form,  so  generally  accepted,  that  some  account  of  it  must  now 
be  given. 

20.  THE  NULL  RESULT  INDEPENDENT  OF  THE  MATERIAL 

CONSTITUTING  THE  APPARATUS. 

Before  this  is  done,  however,  we  may  note  a  fact  of  great 
importance  for  the  general  significance  of  the  Michelson- 
Morley  experiment.  As  first  carried  out,  the  whole  apparatus 
was  mounted  on  a  sandstone  block  which  floated  in  mercury. 
In  the  repetition  by  Morley  and  Miller,  the  distance  between 
the  mirrors  was  intentionally  maintained  by  wooden  rods. 

Thus  if  the  null  effect  is  to  be  explained  by  FitzGerald's 
suggestion,  the  contraction  of  the  right  amount  must  auto- 
matically take  place  in  two  such  different  materials  as  sand- 
stone and  pine.  It  is  difficult  to  think  of  this  as  a  mere 
coincidence,  so  that  we  are  naturally  led  to  think  that  if  we 
accept  the  contraction  hypothesis,  whatever  explanation  of  it 
we  may  adopt,  it  must  be  one  that  is  universal,  and  inherent 
in  the  constitution  of  matter,  even  down  to  the  structure  of 
the  chemical  atom. 

21.  THE  INFLUENCE  OF  THE  MICHELSON-MORLEY  EXPERI- 
MENT ON  THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ELECTRICAL  THEORY. 

The  contraction  hypothesis  of  FitzGerald  is  a  second  in- 
stance of  an  ad  hoc  addition  to  existing  theory  for  the  express 
purpose  of  making  it  fit  the  facts.  The  first  instance,  cited 
above,  was  Fresnel's  hypothesis  of  a  convection-coeffic  ent. 
But  it  was  not  possible  for  the  matter  to  rest  at  this  point. 
Why  should  matter  contract  to  exactly  the  required  extent, 

1 "  Versuch  einer  Theorie  der  Elektrischen  und  optischen  Erscheinungen  in 
bewegten  KOrpern,"  Leiden,  1895. 


24         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

and  that,  too,  in  the  case  of  two  such  different  materials  as 
stone  and  wood?  The  necessity  of  answering  this  question 
supplied  a  direct  and  powerful  stimulus  to  the  construction  of 
a  theory  of  matter  in  which  the  suggested  change  in  the  length 
of  a  body  is  no  longer  an  arbitrary  hypothesis,  but  a  necessary 
consequence. 

The  result  of  these  efforts  was  the  electron  theory  of 
Lorentz  and  Larmor.  In  this  theory  an  ideal  picture  of  matter 
in  general  is  constructed.  The  special  properties  character- 
istic of  the  particular  chemical  constitutions  of  bodies  are 
eliminated  from  the  consideration  at  the  outset ;  the  general 
laws  which  govern  them  are  supposed  to  be  common  to  all 
kinds  of  matter.  All  matter  is  conceived  to  be  composed  of 
electrons,  that  is,  of  small  nuclei  which  are  indivisible,  and, 
though  this  is  not  absolutely  necessary,  of  identical  nature  for 
all  kinds  of  matter.  As  far  as  possible  the  exact  nature  of 
these  electrons,  their  size  and  shape,  and  the  way  in  which  the 
electric  charge  is  distributed  on  them,  is  left  out  of  considera- 
tion. These  electrons  are  in  motion  within  the  body  which 
they  constitute,  and  set  up  an  electro-magnetic  field  accord- 
ing to  the  laws  which  were  first  completely  formulated  by 
Maxwell. 

This  field  in  its  turn  is  supposed  to  determine  the  way  in 
which  the  electrons  move.  But  the  general  laws  which  deter- 
mine the  field  when  the  motions  of  the  electrons  are  given  in 
advance  are  not  sufficient  in  themselves  to  do  this.1  To 
supplement  them  some  further  assumption  has  to  be  made  as 
to  the  nature  of  the  reaction  of  the  aether  on  the  electron. 

We  may  see  at  once  how  the  desire  to  explain  the  auto- 
matic contraction  of  a  body  when  set  in  motion  through  the 
aether  regulated  the  choice  between  the  various  hypotheses 
that  might  present  themselves  to  the  mind.  Lorentz  showed 
that  all  that  was  necessary  beyond  the  equations  of  Maxwell 
to  determine  the  motion  of  an  electron  was  to  assume  (i)  that 
its  exact  size  and  shape,  or,  more  precisely,  the  exact  distribu- 
tion of  the  electric  charge,  should  be  given,  and  (ii)  that  the 
whole  inertia  or  kinetic  reaction  of  the  electron  was  due  to 

1  For  a  fuller  discussion,  see  Chapter  IV,  pp.  51  ff. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  PRINCIPLE  25 

the  electric  field  which  by  its  motion  it  was  setting  up  in  the 
aether.  This  second  assumption  is  known  as  the  *  hypothesis 
of  purely  electro = magnetic  inertia ' ;  it  was  shown  to  be  a 
reasonable  one  by  the  results  of  the  experiments  of  Kaufmann 
in  1901,  on  the  apparent  inertia  of  the  free  electrons  which 
are  supposed  to  constitute  the  cathode  rays. 

Now  what  was  the  assumption  which  Lorentz  found  it 
desirable  to  make  about  the  configuration  of  the  electron? 
Starting  with  a  desire  to  prove  the  reasonableness  of  the  con- 
traction-hypothesis as  a  universal  characteristic  of  all  matter, 
he  was  led  to  assign  the  same  property  to  the  ultimate  com- 
mon element  That  is,  assuming  an  electron  at  rest  to  have 
a  spherical  configuration,  an  electron  moving  with  velocity 
v  is  supposed  to  have  a  spheroidal  shape,  the  whole  electron 
being  squeezed  together  along  the  direction  of  the  velocity  in 
the  ratio  (i  -  v*/<*y  :  I. 

The  reason  for  this  contraction  of  the  electron  is  not  con- 
sidered ;  neither  are  the  agencies  which  hold  the  electron  to- 
gether ;  these  are  eliminated  by  means  of  the  purely  kinematic 
assumption.  But  granting  it  to  exist,  Lorentz  was  able  to 
show  l  considerable  reason  for  anticipating  that  a  body  con- 
stituted according  to  his  scheme  would  automatically  undergo 
the  required  contraction  when  set  in  motion. 

This,  put  rather  bluntly,  is  the  general  result  of  the  work 
of  Lorentz.  Of  course,  there  was  actually  more  support  for 
this  conception  of  the  electron  than  the  mere  fact  that  it 
furnished  an  explanation  of  the  hypothetical  contraction. 
Such,  for  instance,  was  the  fact  that  it  also  gave  an  explana- 
tion of  the  failure  of  the  experiments  of  Rayleigh  and  Brace 
which  sought  to  find  an  evidence  of  double  refraction  in  an 
isotropic  transparent  body  when  set  in  motion  through  the 
aether.2  But  this  does  not  alter  the  fact  that  the  suggestion 
of  the  contracting  electron  is  in  reality  only  throwing  the 
mystery  a  stage  further  back.  If  we  accept  the  suggestion,  it 

1  Lorentz,  "  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.,"  Amst.,  1904 ;   also,  Larmor,  "  ^Ether  and 
Matter,"  1900.     Larmor,  on  the  ground  of  the  theory  developed  here,  demurred 
to  Lord  Rayleigh's  expectation  of  any  effect  (Brit.  Ass.,  Belf.,  1902). 

2  See  below,  p.  56. 


26         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

will  not  be  long  before  we  go  on  to  ask  the  further  question, 
*  Why  is  this  so  ? '  This  can  only  be  answered  by  an  analysis 
of  the  construction  of  the  electron,  in  terms  of  its  parts,  so 
that  we  should  at  once  be  carried  beyond  the  stage  at  which 
the  electron  is  an  ultimate  element  in  our  thought.  At  this 
point,  therefore,  the  assumption  must  be  left  until  something 
arises  which  may  throw  further  light  on  it,  or  furnish  us  with 
an  alternative. 

22.    LORENTZ'S   ARGUMENT  ANTICIPATES   THE   PRINCIPLE 

OF  RELATIVITY. 

At  the  present  moment  it  is  desired  to  call  attention  to  the 
fact  that  the  hypothesis  of  the  contracting  electron  is  nothing 
more  than  throwing  back  on  the  elementary  conceptual  con- 
stituent of  matter  the  very  property  which  it  desired  to 
establish  of  the  objects  of  experience. 

This  is  in  reality  an  application  of  what  came  to  be  known 
in  1905  as  the  Principle  of  Relativity:  that  is,  it  is  a  result  of 
the  assumption  that  the  failure  of  experiments  to  discover  the 
motion  of  the  earth  relative  to  the  aether  is  no  accident,  but  is 
the  result  of  universal  relations  inherent  in  the  constitution 
of  matter.  If  Lorentz's  or  Larmor's  theory  be  true,  then  the 
velocity  of  bodies  relative  to  the  aether  must  for  ever  remain 
unknown.1  This  is  the  point  from  which  the  1905  principle  of 
relativity  starts.  But  the  deduction  of  consequences  from  this 
point  is  independent  of  any  constitutive  theory  of  the  nature 
of  matter.  Lorentz's  theory,  as  far  as  it  goes,  implies  the 
relativity  of  all  its  consequences,  but  many  of  those  results 
can  be  obtained  as  an  immediate  deduction  from  the  hypo- 
thesis of  relativity  apart  from  the  details  of  the  theory.  Not 
only  so,  but  in  regions  where  the  pure  electron  theory  becomes 
inapplicable,  we  may  say  what  laws  are  consistent  with  the 
relativity  of  all  phenomena  and  what  laws  are  not. 

The  law  of  gravitation,  for  instance,  in  the  commonly  ac- 
cepted form,  is  not  consistent  with  the  relativity  implied  by 
the  electron  theory.  If  matter  were  completely  constituted 
according  to  that  theory,  the  law  of  gravitation  would  come 

1  See  Chapter  IV,  p.  55. 


THE  ORIGIN  OF  THE  PRINCIPLE  27 

within  the  scope  of  the  theory,  and  we  should  therefore  expect 
that,  even  if  we  could  use  gravitational  phenomena  in  our 
investigations,  we  should  still  be  unable  to  find  any  evidence 
of  the  earth's  motion  relative  to  the  aether. 
The  question  is  thus  suggested  : — 

(1)  Are  the  observations  of  astronomy  consistent  with  the 
hypothesis  of  relativity  in  the  sense  in  which  we  are  now 
thinking  of  it  ?      Or :    Do   existing  observations  give  us  a 
means,  if  only  the  proper  way  can  be  devised,  of  determining 
the  velocity  of  the  earth  through  the  aether  ? 

(2)  If  we  give  up  hope  of  the  latter  possibility,  and  grant 
that  in  some  way  the  law  of  gravitation  must  be  included  in 
the  scope  of  the  principle  of  relativity,  is  this  because,  contrary 
to  the  usual  opinion,  gravitation  is  really  a  product  of  the 
electrical  constitution  of  matter,  or  is  the  relativity  of  phe- 
nomena in  the  special  sense  of  which  we  are  thinking,  some- 
thing of  wider  range  and  more  deep-seated  than  the  electron 
theory  itself? 

This  fact  of  gravitation  and  our  incapacity  to  coordinate 
it  with  the  other  physical  qualities  of  material  bodies  consti- 
tutes perhaps  the  most  important  region  in  which  the  theory 
of  relativity  can  go  beyond  the  theories  of  the  constitution  of 
matter.  It  is  just  where  these  theories  become  insufficient  to 
give  a  complete  account  of  the  mechanism  on  which  the  pro- 
perties of  matter  depend  that  the  Principle  of  Relativity  be- 
comes of  importance  as  a  supplementary  hypothesis.  The 
examination  of  the  question  as  to  what  light  it  could  throw 
on  the  problem  of  gravitation  was  no  doubt  a  great  stimulus 
to  the  revolutionary  work  of  Einstein,  which  has  now  gone  far 
beyond  the  Special  Principle  of  1905. 


CHAPTER  III. 

THE  RELATIVITY  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME. 

23.  IN  order  to  arrive  at  the  essential  point  which  Einstein 
added  in  1905  to  the  argument  of  Lorentz,  we  will  now 
begin  to  examine  some  positive  results  of  the  fundamental 
assumption  that  it  is  impossible  to  determine  the  actual 
velocity  of  the  earth  relative  to  the  aether,  conceived  after  the 
manner  of  Lorentz  as  a  unique  medium  which  is  capable  of 
use  as  a  frame  of  reference. 

It  is  assumed  that  the  fundamental  property  of  the  aether, 
that  of  propagating  effects  with  a  definite  velocity,  the  same 
at  all  points  and  in  all  directions,  is  one  of  the  phenomena 
with  which  we  are  concerned.  This  implies  that  we  shall 
assume  that  the  result  of  the  experiment  of  Michelson  and 
Morley  is  general ;  that  is,  we  assume  that  we  are  ever  to 
remain  in  ignorance  of  any  difference  between  the  velocities 
of  light  in  different  directions  relative  to  the  earth  or,  more 
generally,  to  any  given  observer. 

Now  this  means  that  for  all  practical  purposes  we  may 
at  any  instant  suppose  the  observer  to  have  any  velocity  we 
choose.  But  we  may  not,  of  course,  attribute  to  him  any 
arbitrary  acceleration  ;  because,  as  was  said  at  the  outset,  it  is 
not  yet  assumed  that  the  relativity  extends  to  the  concealment 
of  all  motion,  but  only  of  a  motion  which  is  uniform.  For 
the  present,  when  we  speak  of  an  observer  we  mean  an 
observer  who  is  moving  uniformly  relative  to  the  aether,  so 
that  we  may  choose  a  frame  of  reference  in  which  he  is 
permanently  at  rest. 

24.  ON  THE  IDEA  OF  SIMULTANEITY. 

As  a  result  of  the  fact  that  an  unambiguous  conception 
of  time  emerges  out  of  the  system  of  dynamics,  the  idea 

28 


THE  RELATIVITY  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME  29 

of  '  simultaneous  events  at  different  places '  came  to  be 
considered  as  one  about  which  there  was  no  lack  of  defini- 
tion. 

If  we  examine  the  development  of  the  idea,  however,  we 
see  that  it  arose  gradually  in  some  such  way  as  this.  In 
the  first  instance,  events  which  were  seen  by  the  eye  at  the 
same  moment  were  considered  to  be  simultaneous.  But  in 
reality  the  simultaneity  was  not  in  the  events,  but  in  the 
observer's  consciousness.  This  is,  in  fact,  the  only  kind  of 
absolute  coincidence  about  the  meaning  of  which  there  is  no 
doubt.  For  as  soon  as  the  finite  velocity  of  propagation  of 
light  is  recognised,  it  has  to  be  allowed  for  in  estimating 
the  moments  of  occurrence  of  events  at  a  distance  from  the 
observer.  Not  only  this,  but  the  velocity  of  the  observer 
must  be  allowed  for  if  he  is  thought  to  be  moving. 

In  doing  this  the  actual  observations  made  are  necessarily 
of  what  may  be  called  'coincidences'.  Measurement  only 
becomes  exact  when  mental  judgment  of  distances  and  in- 
tervals is  eliminated.  It  is  the  chief  aim  of  the  experimenter 
to  do  this  as  far  as  possible.  If  we  seek  to  date  some  celestial 
phenomenon,  what  we  observe  is  a  coincidence,  that  of  a  light 
impression  falling  upon  some  terrestrial  object,  as  the  eye.  In 
allowing  for  the  time  of  transmission  of  the  light,  we  enter 
the  realm  of  theory,  and  postulate  some  law  such  as  that  of 
the  constancy  of  the  velocity  of  light.  If  this  is  all  we  pos- 
tulate, and  if  we  have  no  other  means  than  that  of  light 
signals  for  setting  up  a  scale  of  '  simultaneity '  for  events 
on  the  earth,  and  at  distant  celestial  points,  then  it  will  be 
seen  that  we  are  not  able  to  date  the  event  uniquely. 

If  the  conception  of  a  definite  and  unique  aether  be  adopted, 
then  for  an  observer  at  rest  in  it  a  criterion  of  simultaneity 
can  be  set  up  as  follows.  Let  A,  B  be  two  points,  each  of 
which  is  supposed  to  be  at  permanent  rest  in  the  aether,  and 
let  a  ray  of  light  be  emitted  from  A  at  an  instant  tlt  in  the  di- 
rection AB.  Let  this  ray  be  reflected  back  on  its  arrival  at  B, 
the  moment  of  reflection  being  called  /2.  Let  the  reflected 
ray  arrive  at  A  again  at  an  instant  which  we  will  call  /8.  Then 
on  the  ordinary  view,  A  and  B  being  at  rest  in  the  aether,  t 


30        RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

must  be  considered  as  simultaneous  with  the  instant  midway 
between  t±  and  t^.     We  may  write 

^  =  K^  +  «    -       -       -     (0 

On  the  other  hand,  if  A  and  B  have  a  common  velocity  v 
in  the  direction  AB,  and  the  same  process  of  transmission  of 
a  ray  of  light  from  A  to  B  and  back  again  is  carried  out,  this 
will  not  be  so.  For  if  /  represents  the  constant  distance  AB 
and  the  instants  corresponding  to  t^  /j,  4  are  denoted  by 
A>  ^*  **  then  we  have 

/«-:/,  --#£-4 

*•-'•-//('+*> 

These  equations  lead  to 


Thus  in  this  case  the  instant  of  reflection  is  not  to  be  con- 
sidered as  simultaneous  with  the  instant  midway  between  the 
instants  of  the  start  and  return  of  the  signal 

Now  as  long  as  we  have  any  hope  of  knowing  the  velocity 
of  a  given  point  relative  to  the  aether,  this  fact  is  in  no  sense 
confusing.  But  if  we  grant  the  hypothesis  of  relativity,  and 
reconcile  ourselves  to  the  thought  that  we  shall  never  know 
the  actual  velocity  of  the  points  A  and  B,  then  we  must  also 
face  the  consequence  that  we  can  never  know  which  instant  at 
B  may  be  called,  more  than  any  other,  *  simultaneous  '  with  a 
given  instant  at  A.  Or  we  may  say  that  the  phrase  '  simul- 
taneous events  at  different  points  '  has  no  meaning  until  the 
velocity  of  those  points  is  stated. 

This  is  one  of  the  main  distinctions  between  the  outlook 
here  suggested  and  that  of  the  earlier  thought  We  cannot, 
granting  the  fundamental  assumption,  say  that  there  exists  on 
physical  grounds  a  unique  means  of  ordering  phenomena  in 
time  regardless  of  their  position.  If  on  metaphysical  grounds 
we  desire  to  think  that  there  is  really  a  unique  and  absolute 
meaning  for  the  time  which  we  measure,  yet  we  must  admit 
that  we  have  no  means  of  knowing  whether  we  are  using  it  or 
not  It  is  exactly  the  same  position  to  which  we  are  brought 
in  respect  of  the  aether.  We  may  assert  its  existence,  but  we 
have  no  means  of  identifying  it,  and  the  definition  of  it  in 


THE  RELATIVITY  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME  31 

terms  of  its  properties  determines  it  only  as  one  of  an  infinite 
number,  all  of  which  have  identical  properties. 

25.  ON  THE  MEASUREMENT  OF  LENGTH  AND  THE 
CONCEPTION  OF  RIGIDITY. 

If  it  be  granted  that  we  must  leave  the  question  of  the 
simultaneity  of  events  an  unanswered  one,  we  are  also  faced 
with  a  difficulty  about  the  notion  of  the  distance  between  two 
given  points  of  a  material  body.  In  the  ordinary  or  Newtonian 
way  of  measuring  lengths  on  a  moving  body,  the  length  of  a 
given  line  in  the  body  must  be  defined  as  the  distance  be- 
tween the  two  points  of  space  which  are  occupied  by  the  ends 
of  the  line  at  simultaneous  instants^  the  conception  of  distances 
between  the  points  of  space  being  supposed,  like  the  concep- 
tion of  absolute  intervals  of  time,  to  be  an  a  priori  one. 

But  if  we  grant  that  we  cannot  speak  without  ambiguity  of 
'simultaneous  instants'  until  we  have  chosen  an  arbitrary 
body  to  be  the  one  which  is  said  to  be  at  rest  at  a  particular 
moment,  then  it  is  clear  that  we  cannot,  without  further 
definition,  speak  of  the  length  of  a  given  line  in  a  body  until 
we  know  what  velocity  is  assigned  to  it 

It  is  taken  for  granted,  in  the  classical  treatment  of  the 
dynamics  of  rigid  bodies,  that  the  distances  between  the 
various  parts  of  a  body  are  invariable  in  the  motion.  This 
conception  of  an  ideal  rigid  body  is  fundamental,  and  space  is 
conceived  to  be  so  graduated  that  a  given  body  occupies  a 
region  of  exactly  the  same  size  and  shape  at  every  instant, 
and  that  this  region  is  independent  of  the  velocity  of  the 
body. 

We  see  now  that  this  conception  is  breaking  down  at 
various  points.  First  we  have  the  suggestion  of  FitzGerald 
that  every  body  contracts  on  being  set  in  motion ;  then  we 
have  the  difficulty  of  defining  what  we  mean  by  the  region 
occupied  by  the  body  at  a  given  instant  on  account  of  the 
difficulty  about  what  we  mean  by  simultaneous  positions  of  dif- 
ferent points  of  the  body.  Not  only  this,  but  we  have  a  further 
practical  difficulty  in  the  fact  that  if  our  conception  of  metrical 
space  is  based  on  that  of  an  ideal  rigid  body  this  seems  to 


32         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

react  on  the  measurement  of  time,  since  we  have  the  apparent 
truth  that  equal  distances  are  traversed  by  a  ray  of  light  in 
equal  intervals  of  time. 

In  order  to  deal  with  the  apparently  confused  situation  so 
created  it  is  necessary  to  make  an  entirely  new  beginning  and 
to  build  up  afresh  our  statement  of  what  we  mean  by  the 
system  of  measurement  of  space  and  time  that  we  employ. 
In  the  remainder  of  this  chapter  we  shall  see  the  position 
adopted  by  Einstein  in  1905.  But  his  thoroughgoing  recon- 
struction will  be  described  later. 

26.  THE  CONSTRUCTION  OF  ALL  POSSIBLE  SPACE  AND 
TIME  SYSTEMS. 

We  retain  for  the  present  the  assumption  that  we  are  un- 
able to  determine  a  difference  in  the  velocity  of  light  in  dif- 
ferent directions.1  If  we  did  not  make  some  hypothesis  of 
this  nature  to  replace  the  graduation  of  space  by  means  of  a 
rigid  body  and  of  time  by  the  rotation  of  the  earth,  we  should 
have  no  defmiteness  in  our  system  of  time  and  space  at  all.2 
We  can  order  the  events  which  happen  in  the  universe  in  an 
infinite  number  of  ways.  Suppose,  for  instance,  that  we  as- 
sociate with  any  point  of  space  the  quantities  (ar,  y,  z),  and 
with  any  instant  of  time  at  that  point  the  quantity  /.  If  we 
take  four  quantities  (x  ,y ,  z\  /),  defined  as  any  arbitrary  func- 
tions of  (x,  yy  z,  /),  then  with  any  occurrence  is  associated  a  set 
of  quantities  (x,  y,  z,  /),  and  consequently  a  set  of  quantities 
(x ',  y,  z\  /).  Events  may  be  described,  as  far  as  their  order 
is  concerned,  by  relations  between  these  quantities.  For 
example,  the  motion  of  a  moving  point  may  be  described 
either  by  saying  how  (x,  y,  z)  vary  as  t  varies,  or  how  (x  ,y\  #') 
vary  with  /.  Who  shall  say,  or  how  shall  we  know,  whether 
the  former  or  the  latter  is  the  proper  set  of  quantities  associated 
with  our  resolution  of  the  history  of  the  physical  universe  into 
space  and  time  sequences. 

It  is  only  when  we  begin  to  speak  of  the  form  of  the  re- 
lations which  hold  between  the  motions  of  different  points  that 

1  Actually  this  is  given  up  in  the  new  theory. 

2  This  is,  in  fact,  the  case  in  the  general  Principle  of  Relativity. 


THE  RELATIVITY  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME  33 

the  choice  of  the  variables  which  are  used  to  describe  the 
motions  is  in  any  way  limited.  The  Newtonian  form  of  the 
laws  of  motion  limits  us,  not  to  a  single  set  of  time  and  space 
co-ordinates,  but  to  a  group  of  an  infinite  number,  the  relation 
between  any  one  set  (x^  ylt  #x)  and  any  other  (>2,  jj/2,  #2)  being 
of  the  form 

x^  =  x^  -  utv  /2  =  yl  -  vtv  *,»*!-  wt^  ^  =  tY 
A  fixed  point  in  the  second  set  is  a  point  which  in  the  first 
set  satisfies  the  relations 

x\  ~  ut\  =  const-j  y\  ~  vt\  —  const,  ^  -  wt^  =  const. ; 
that^is,  it  is  a  point  moving  with  velocity  (u,  v,  w).     Here 
(u,  v,  w]  are  any  arbitrary  velocities  whatever.     (See  p.  1 1.) 

27.  THE  HYPOTHESIS  OF-  THE  CONSTANCY  OF  THE 
VELOCITY  OF  LIGHT. 

What  now  is  the  corresponding  limitation  imposed  by  our 
attempt  to  maintain,  instead  of  the  Newtonian  laws,  the  fact 
of  the  constant  and  universal  velocity  of  light  ?  This  limita- 
tion is  simply  that  between  any  two  possible  sets  of  space- 
time  co-ordinates  (x^y^  zlt  ^),  (x^  jj/2,  z^  ^2)  there  must  be  such 
relations  that,  if  a  point  is  moving  with  velocity  c  in  the  first 
set,  it  is  also  moving  with  velocity  c  in  the  second  set. 
This  may  be  set  down  in  mathematical  form  thus : — 
If  the  moving  point  changes  its  space  co-ordinates  by 
amounts  (f1?  77^  £)  in  an  interval  of  time  TI}  and  the  cor- 
responding quantities  in  the  second  system  of  reference  are 
(£j>  ^2>  £2)  and  T2 ;  then  as  a  consequence  of  the  equation 

fz2  +  %2  +  &'  -  <V 
we  must  have 

&2  +  %2  +  ti  -  ^v. 

Now,  it  is  a  purely  mathematical  problem  to  find  out  for  what 
kind  of  relation  between  the  two  sets  of  co-ordinates  this  con- 
sequence can  and  must  arise ;  and  it  is  a  problem  which  is 
capable  of  complete  solution.  The  complete  solution  gives 
us,  of  course,  certain  obvious  changes  of  co-ordinates  which  we 
need  not  discuss ;  namely  (i)  the  addition  of  mere  constants 
to  x,  y,  2,  and  /,  and  (ii)  a  uniform  change  in  the  scale  of  all 
four  co-ordinates,  which  amounts  to  nothing  more  than  a 

3 


34         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

multiplication  of  the  units  of  space  and  time  by  the  same 
quantity,  a  process  which  clearly  will  not  alter  the  measure  of 
the  velocity  of  a  moving  point.  There  is  also  the  obvious 
possibility  of  turning  the  space  frame  of  reference  round  into 
any  other  angular  position. 

But  apart  from  these  there  is  still  an  infinite  number  of 
ways  of  changing  the  co-ordinates.  Of  these  there  is  an  in- 
finite number  which  are  linear  transformations,1  that  is,  in  which 
each  of  the  new  set  of  co-ordinates  can  be  derived  from  those 
of  the  old  set  by  taking  sums  of  constant  multiples  of  the  four 
co-ordinates  of  that  set.  We  may  show  by  a  simple  algebraical 
calculation  that  these  can  all  be  obtained  from  a  change  of 
variables  of  the  following  simple  type  : — 

*2  =  £(*!  -  vt^y*  =  j/i,  ^2  =  *lf  *,  =  £(/!  -  w^)  .  (A) 
Here  /8  =  (i  -  z/2/^2)  ~*  where  v  is  arbitrary. 

Suppose  now  that  we  consider  a  point  which  is  at  rest  in 
the  system  of  co-ordinates  (x^  yz,  #2,  /2),  that  is  a  point  for  which 
the  space  co-ordinates  (ar2,  j2,  #2)  have  fixed  values.  Then 
applying  the  relation  (A)  we  find  that  for  this  point 

(*i  -  vtj,  ^i  and  XT, 

have  constant  values,  that  is,  the  point  has  a  velocity  v 
parallel  to  the  axis  of  xlt  if  (x^  yly  zlt  /1})  are  considered  to 
be  its  space-time  co-ordinates.  This  velocity  v  is  of  arbitrary 
magnitude  and  direction,  since  the  axis  of  x  may  be  taken  in 
any  direction  we  please ;  so  that  we  may  write  down  a  trans- 
formation of  this  type  which  will  cause  a  point  at  rest  in  one 
system  of  co-ordinates  to  have  in  the  new  system  any  velocity 
that  we  choose  to  assign. 

28.  If  we  put 

*2  =  j3*j  +  acfl9  y*  =  ylt  z2  =  glt  <rfa  =  yxl  +  8ctlt 
this  gives  identically 

x?  +  y?  +  z?  -  M?  =  x£  +  yf  +  g*  -  c*t*, 
provided  that  /S2  -  -y2  =  S2  -  a2  =  i 

and  a/3  -  yd  =  O. 

These  conditions  lead  to 

«2  =  /32  -  i,/  =  /32-  i,82  =  ^ 
so  that,  if  we  put  a//3  =  -  z//r,  we  have 

£2(i  -  &!<*)  =  i, 
so  that  the  formulae  for  the  change  of  co-ordinates  are  as  stated. 

1  It  is  possible  to  generalize  all  that  follows  to  include  the  tranformations 
which  are  not  linear. 


THE  RELATIVITY  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME  35 

29.    THE   LORENTZ-TRANSFORMATION. 

The  transformations  of  type  (A)  lie  at  the  heart  of  the 
history  and  early  developments  of  the  Principle  of  Relativity. 
They  are  commonly  known  as  Lorentz-Transformations. 
They  were  not  first  arrived  at  in  the  way  which  has  been 
given  above.  Lorentz  was  the  first  to  see  their  significance 
for  the  theory  of  the  optical  and  electrical  effects  in  moving 
bodies,  though  he  neglected  the  square  of  v\c,  and  so  took 
y8  =  I.  His  results  only  professed  to  be  accurate  as  far  as 
the  first  order  in  vie.  The  approximation  was  carried  a  stage 
further  by  Larmor,1  who  showed  by  the  use  of  the  above  vari- 
ables how  the  second  order  effects  of  motion  through  the 
aether  would  be  concealed.  Einstein  was  the  first  to  use  the 
transformations  in  the  significance  which  we  have  seen  them 
to  have. 

What  we  have  to  do  now  is  to  see  whether  the  facts  of 
physical  observation  are  in  agreement  with  the  suggestion  that 
any  two  systems  of  measurement  of  space  and  time  which  are 
related  to  one  another  by  a  Lorentz-transformation  are  equally 
valid.  We  have  seen  that  it  is  consistent  with  the  facts 
known  of  the  propagation  of  light  through  free  space.  It 
remains  to  be  seen  whether  the  known  facts  of  electro- 
magnetism  and  dynamics  (including  observational  astronomy) 
can  be  fitted  into  this  framework  of  space  and  time  without 
contradiction ;  these  being  taken  as  representing  the  exact 
branches  of  physical  science.  If  this  can  be  done,  the  result 
will  be  that  all  the  facts  at  our  disposal  are  unable  to 
distinguish  between  these  sets  of  co-ordinates  as  valid  or 
convenient  measures  of  space  and  time. 

30.  ON  THE  DIMENSIONS  OF  A  MOVING  BODY. 

We  are  now  able  to  express  definitely  what  is  to  be  as- 
sumed of  the  dimensions  of  a  moving  body  under  the  funda- 
mental hypothesis  that  we  have  made. 

The  '  length  of  any  line  in  a  body '  is,  as  was  said  above, 
defined  to  be  the  distance  between  two  points  of  space  which 
are  occupied  simultaneously  by  the  ends  of  the  line.  Let  us 

1  "  ^Ether  and  Matter,"  Cambridge,  1900,  pp.  173-7. 

3* 


36        RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

suppose  that  we  have  a  body  which  is  at  rest  in  the  system 
of  co-ordinates  (x,  y,  z,  t).  Let  the  time-space  co-ordinates 
for  two  particular  points  of  the  body  be  (x^  y^  z^  ^)  and 
(x^  y<b  zto  ^)>  and  let  tne  corresponding  quantities  in  another 
system  of  reference  be  denoted  by  the  addition  of  an  accent. 
Then  applying  the  equation  (A)  twice  and  subtracting  we 
have 

*i  -  »(*2  -  yl,-        •      (3) 


**    -  *i    ~  /%  -  ^-  v  (^-  x^}   .     (4) 
The  last  equation  shows  that  if  we  take  simultaneous  posi- 
tions of  the  two  points  in  the  second  system  by  putting  /2' 
equal  to  t^,  the  corresponding  times  in  the  first  system  differ 
by  an  amount  given  by 

0   =    *2    -    *i    -    V  (**    -   X^' 

But  since  the  body  is  at  rest  in  the  first  system,  ^  and  x%  are 
independent  of  ^  and  t^ 

Putting  (£/  -  //)  equal  to  the  value  given  above,  (4),  we 
obtain  from  (3)  for  the  difference  between  the  simultaneous 
values  of  x^  and  x^  the  value 


_ 

that  is  the  apparent  length  of  a  body  in  the  direction  of  the 
velocity  which  it  is  conceived  to  have,  is  less  than  the  apparent 
length  when  it  is  conceived  to  be  at  rest,  in  the  ratio 
I  :  (I  -  z/2/£-2)%  the  dimensions  at  right  angles  to  the  direction 
of  the  velocity  being  the  same. 

31.  Is  THE  FITZGERALD  CONTRACTION  A  REAL  ONE? 

Naturally  there  arises  in  the  mind  the  question  whether 
this  apparent  contraction  is  in  any  sense  a  real  one.  To 
meet  this  one  or  two  suggestions  may  be  given.  Lorentz, 
working  always  with  the  conception  of  a  unique  aether,  insists 
that  the  contraction  is  a  real  one,  and  not,  as  the  position 
above  outlined  may  seem  to  imply,  a  purely  subjective  change 
in  the  system  of  measurement 

But  the  question  which  must  be  asked  is,  "  What  is  meant  by 
a  real  contraction  ?  "  In  what  sense  is  it  possible  to  speak  of 


THE  RELATIVITY  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME  37 

a  contraction  at  all?  It  must  be  a  contraction  relative  to 
something,  something  which  is  conceived  to  have  a  permanent 
configuration.  This  something  may  be  taken  to  be  the  con- 
ceptual frame  of  reference,  and  so  long  as  the  frame  of  reference 
is  a  unique  one  the  question  as  to  the  existence  is  one  with  a 
meaning.  But  until  the  frame  is  defined  this  is  not  so. 

The  position  taken  then  in  regard  to  the  contraction  of  the 
apparatus  of  Michelson's  experiment  when  rotated  relative  to 
the  earth  is  this.  Let  us  assume  that,  when  we  take  a  frame  of 
reference  in  which  the  apparatus  is  at  rest,  the  configuration  of 
the  apparatus  is  unchanged  when  it  is  turned  round  so  slowly 
that  the  effect  of  centrifugal  forces  in  straining  the  body  may  be 
neglected,  as  well  as  the  effect  due  to  the  altered  strain  arising 
from  the  change  in  position  relative  to  the  gravitational  field 
of  the  earth.  That  is,  we  assume,  in  accordance  with  the 
Principle  of  Relativity,  that  an  observer  on  the  earth  will 
observe  no  effect  on  the  apparatus  as  a  consequence  of  the 
motion  of  the  earth.  This  being  so,  the  conclusion  drawn 
from  the  fundamental  hypothesis  of  the  principle  by  the  an- 
alysis given  above  is  that,  if  we  refer  everything  to  a  frame  of 
reference  relative  to  which  the  earth  is  moving,  there  will 
actually  be  a  contraction  of  the  apparatus  as  measured  by 
the  co-ordinates  of  this  frame. 

But,  of  course,  this  real  contraction  will  not  be  capable  of 
detection ;  for  in  order  to  measure  it  physically  it  is  necessary 
to  lay  alongside  of  the  apparatus  another  comparison  body, 
and  to  allow  this  body  to  remain  alongside  and  to  share  the 
displacement  of  the  apparatus.  It  will  therefore  share  also  in 
the  universal  contraction,  and  the  measurements  will  remain 
as  before. 

32.  CRITICISMS  OF  THE  USE  OF  LIGHT  SIGNALS. 

The  objection  is  often  raised  against  the  argument  of  the 
preceding  sections  that  the  introduction  of  this  fundamental 
assumption  of  the  constant  velocity  of  light  for  the  purpose 
of  controlling  the  time  standards  at  different  places  is  in  reality 
a  very  artificial  proceeding.  This  objection  should  be  con- 
sidered carefully  before  going  any  further. 


38         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

The  first  question  that  may  be  asked  is,  "  H"ave  we  any 
right  to  suppose  that  there  is  no  means  of  communicating 
between  distant  points  other  than,  and  independent  of,  the 
transmission  of  light.  If  such  a  means  existed  it  might  be 
used  to  set  up  a  standard  of  simultaneity  which  is  different 
from  that  given  by  the  equation  (2),  p.  30." 

It  used  often  to  be  suggested,  for  instance,  that  gravitation 
is  propagated  instantaneously,  or,  at  any  rate,  with  a  velocity 
enormously  greater  than  that  of  light.  In  view,  however,  of 
the  new  theory  of  gravitation  to  be  described  later  it  will  not 
be  worth  while  discussing  this  here.  The  whole  of  the  present 
argument  must  be  taken  as  preparing  the  way  for  the  broader 
outlook. 

A  second  form  of  the  same  objection  is  that  in  practice 
our  measure  of  time  is  controlled  by  the  dynamical  motion  of 
the  earth.  This  amounts,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  to  saying  that 
the  time  which  we  use  in  practice  is  the  uniquely  defined  time 
of  the  Newtonian  dynamics.  But,  as  we  shall  see  later,  the 
classical  dynamics  cannot  be  considered  any  longer  as  absolute 
in  its  accuracy.  This  is  obvious  merely  from  the  fact  that  we 
know  that  moving  charged  bodies  do  not  obey  the  Newtonian 
laws  of  motion ;  the  deviation  has  been  actually  observed  in 
the  case  of  the  cathode  rays  and  the  /3-rays.  We  shall  hardly 
expect  therefore,  that  with  the  modern  view  that  matter  is 
largely,  if  not  wholly,  of  electrical  constitution,  the  dynamics 
of  material  bodies  will  conform  exactly  to  the  simple  scheme 
propounded  by  Newton.  We  are  almost  prepared,  in  fact,  to 
believe  that  the  exact  dynamics  of  matter  will  be  a  very  com- 
plicated matter.  Abraham,  for  example,  dealing  with  the 
mechanics  of  the  electron,  obtains  a  formula  *  for  the  apparent 
mass  of  a  single  electron  which  makes  it  appear  almost  hope- 
less to  think  of  further  progress  in  the  direction  of  evaluating 
the  mass  of  a  much  more  complicated  system. 

Now,  as  we  shall  see  later2  just  at  this  point  the  Prin- 
ciple of  Relativity  was  able  to  step  in  and  indicate  a  general 
modification  of  the  usual  formulae  of  dynamics  which  renders 

1 "  Theorie  der  Elektrizitat,"  vol.  ii,  2nd  edition,  Leipzig,  1908,  p.  180. 
2  Chapter  V. 


THE  RELATIVITY  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME  39 

them  consistent  with  the  standards  of  time  and  space  set  up 
in  the  preceding  sections.  The  modifications  required  are 
everywhere  of  the  order  of  the  square  or  some  higher  power 
of  the  ratio  of  the  velocity  of  the  body  to  that  of  light,  and 
if  these  quantities  are  neglected  the  formulae  reduce  to  the 
ordinary  Newtonian  form. 

These  modifications  were  found  to  be  in  strict  accordance 
with  the  direct  evidence  available  from  experiments  on  the 
motion  of  the  free  negative  electrons  in  the  cathode  and 
/3-rays,1  which  at  present  are  the  only  moving  systems  in 
which  the  velocities  are  sufficiently  great  to  render  the  devia- 
tion from  Newtonian  mechanics  appreciable. 

Further,  there  is  strong  indirect  support  in  the  null  results 
of  the  experiments  of  Rayleigh  and  Brace,  Trouton  and  Noble, 
which  cannot  be  explained  by  a  combination  of  existing 
electrical  theory  with  Newtonian  dynamics.2 

The  objections  raised  are  therefore  such  as  can  only  be 
maintained  by  showing  either  that  there  are  some  experimental 
facts  which  are  not  reconcilable  with  the  hypothesis  of  con- 
stant light  velocity,  or  else  by  showing  that  an  unnecessary 
complication  is  introduced  into  our  thought  by  making  this 
assumption. 

33.  THE  VELOCITY  ADDITION  FORMULA. 

If  we  consider  a  moving  point  which  is  displaced  in  time 
Bt  through  distances  &tr,  ty,  §z  parallel  to  the  three  co-ordinate 
axes,  the  corresponding  displacements  when  measured  in  the 
system  (x>y  >  z,  /)  can  be  obtained  by  applying  the  equations 
(A)  twice  for  the  positions  at  the  beginning  and  end  of  the 
interval  S/.  On  subtraction  we  get 

&r  =  £(&r  -  vSf),  S/  =  fy,  &ar'  =  Sz,  S/  =  0(St  -  vtejc*)  (5) 
From  these,  dividing  &/,  S/,  82'  by  S/,  we  get  expressions  for 
the  velocities  as  estimated  in  the  new  frame  of  reference : — 
u*  -  v        ,  3u  u 


I  -  vuxl<*>    y       i  -  vuxl<?  I  - 


1  Vide  §  52,  p.  65. 

2  §§47-9  infra. 


40         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

If  we  put  u  equal  to  zero  in  these  equations,  u  becomes 
equal  to  (  -  v)  in  the  direction  of  the  axis  of  x. 

Conversely  since,  as  we  have  seen,  the  formulae  (A)  can  be 
reversed  by  simply  changing  the  sign  of  vy  if  u  is  zero,  u  is 
equal  to  v  in  the  positive  sense. 

Thus  a  point  at  rest  in  the  first  system  of  co-ordinates  and 
a  point  at  rest  in  the  second  system  have  a  velocity  v  relative 
to  one  another. 

34.  RELATIVE  VELOCITY. 

In  the  ordinary  way  of  speaking  the  relative  velocity  of 
two  points  is  defined  as  the  difference  of  their  velocities,  this 
being  the  same  for  all  frames  of  reference.  But  as  a 
consequence  of  the  equations  (a)  this  definition  would  not 
give  us  a  determinate  value  for  the  relative  velocity.  We 
therefore  substitute  the  following  definition  :  the  velocity  of  a 
point  P  relative  to  a  point  Q  is  the  velocity  of  P  in  a  system  of 
co-ordinates  in  which  Q  is  at  rest. 

Such  a  system  can  always  be  chosen  ;  for  if  we  take  an 
arbitrary  system,  and  the  velocity  of  Q  in  this  system  is  v 
then  taking  the  axis  of  x  in  the  direction  of  this  velocity,  and 
applying  the  transformation  (a),  the  velocity  of  Q  in  the  new 
system  is,  as  we  have  seen,  zero. 

Thus,  for  example,  if  we  have  three  points  A,  B,  C,  of 
which  B  has  a  velocity  u  relative  to  A,  and  C  has  a  velocity 
v  relative  to  B  in  the  same  direction  as  &,  then  the  velocity  of 
C  relative  to  A  is  not  (u  +  v\  but  (u  +  v)/(l  +  uvfc2). 

35.  THE  VELOCITY  OF  LIGHT  AS  A  CRITICAL  VELOCITY. 
From  the  relations  above,  (5),  p.  39,  we  have  identically 


or  &'2(V2  -  ^)  =  W  (u2  -  **)  ;      .          .     (6) 

hence  if  u  is  less  than  c,  so  is  u  ;  that  is,  if  the  velocity  of  a 
moving  point  is  less  than  the  velocity  of  light  in  any  system  of 
reference,  it  is  also  less  in  any  other,  provided  always  that  the 
velocity  v  is  also  less  than  c. 

An  example  of  this  may  be  given  in  reference  to  an  objection 
that  has  often  been  raised  to  the  point  of  view  of  the  Principle 


THE  RELATIVITY  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME  41 

of  Relativity.  It  is  suggested l  that  whereas  the  analysis  of 
the  principle  indicates  that  relative  velocities  greater  than  that 
of  light  are  physically  impossible,  yet  there  is  an  actual  possi- 
bility of  observing  in  nature  a  relative  velocity  considerably 
greater.  We  may  imagine,  for  instance,  two  /3-particles  shot 
out  by  a  radio-active  body  in  opposite  directions  with  veloci- 
ties, each  equal  to  nine-tenths  of  that  of  light ;  and  here  is  an 
actual  difference  of  velocity  equal  to  I  '8  c.  This  is  quite  true, 
and  the  Principle  of  Relativity  has  nothing  to  say  against  it. 
The  principle  maintains  that  a  velocity  greater  than  c  relative 
to  the  observer  cannot  be  observed  ;  this  is  in  accordance  with 
the  facts  in  the  case  in  question.  Further,  the  relative  velocity 
of  two  bodies,  as  defined  above,  cannot  be  greater  than  c ; 
this  also  is  in  agreement  with  the  example  chosen ;  for  if  in 
the  expression  (u  +  v}\(\  +  uv/c2)  we  put  both  u  and  v  equal  to 
'9fy  we  get>  not  I  '8*,  but  I  -8/1  -8  ic,  which  is  certainly  less  than  c. 
The  position  is. not  that  velocities  greater  than  c  are  not 
conceivable,  but  that  real  bodies  become  illusory  in  observa- 
tion if  they  are  conceived  to  be  moving  faster  than  light.  We 
shall  also  see  later  that  the  electrical  constitution  of  matter 
seems  to  indicate  that  a  body  would  suffer  dissolution  if  it 
were  accelerated  so  that  its  velocity  were  made  greater  than  c. 
Not  only  so,  but  the  energy  of  a  body  tends  to  an  infinite 
value  as  its  velocity  is  increased  towards  c,  so  that  consistently 
with  our  ordinary  conceptions  of  energy,  it  would  not  be  pos- 
sible to  set  a  body  in  motion  from  rest  with  this  velocity. 
Of  course,  there  is  nothing  to  hinder  us  if  we  please  from 
thinking  of  bodies  which  have  a  real  configuration  for  a  velo- 
city which  is  greater  than  c ;  but  such  bodies  would  suffer  dis- 
solution if  they  were  caused  to  move  with  a  velocity  less  than 
c,  and  an  infinite  amount  of  energy  would  be  used  in  the  re- 
tardation. 

36.  THE  FIZEAU  EXPERIMENT  AND  FRESNEL'S 
CONVECTION-COEFFICIENT. 

We  may  now  consider  the  way  in  which  the  above  con- 
siderations give  an  account  of  the  result  of  Fizeau's  experiment. 

1  Vide  Soddy,  "  Nature,"  November,  1913. 


42         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

We  suppose  that  a  light  disturbance  travels  through  a  re- 
fracting substance  with  a  relative  velocity  c/p ;  that  is,  this 
is  the  velocity  in  a  frame  of  reference  in  which  the  refracting 
material  is  at  rest.  Suppose  now  that  we  change  to  a  frame 
of  reference  in  which  the  material  has  a  velocity  v  in  the 
direction  of  propagation  of  the  light. 

Then,  applying  the  addition  equation,  the  velocity  of  the 
light  disturbance  in  this  frame  of  reference  is 


e.+v 


Thus,  neglecting  z;2,  we  arrive  at  once  at  the  convection- 
coefficient  (I  —  yLT2). 

In  the  repetition  of  Fizeau's  experiment  by  Michelson  and 
Morley  the  figure  arrived  at  for  this  coefficient  was  '442  -f  'O2.1 
Taking  the  known  value  of  //,  for  sodium  light  the  theoretical 
value  is  "438.  Thus  the  agreement  is  satisfactory  enough. 

37.  THE  DOPPLER  EFFECT. 

In  the  same  way,  we  may  give  also  a  simple  account  of 
the  Doppler  effect. 

If  light,  of  period  T  to  a  given  observer,  is  travelling  along 
the  axis  of.tr,  any  component  of  the  disturbance  maybe  taken 
as  proportional  to  a  harmonic  function 


sin  1  —  (t-. 


a} 


where  x  and  t  are  space-time  co-ordinates  jin  which  the  observer 
is  at  rest. 

If  now  we  change  to  a  system  in  which  the  observer  has 
velocity  ( -  v)  by  putting 

*=£(*•'+  vf),  t  =  p  (/  +  vxl?) 
we  have 

1 "  Amer.  Journ.  of  Sci.,"  31, 1885.     The  figure  given  in  this  paper  is  -434,  but 
there  appears  to  be  an  arithmetical  error,  the  data  given  leading  to  -442. 


THE  RELATIVITY  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME  43 


where  —, 


neglecting 


Here  r'  is  the  period  as  seen  by  an  observer  at  rest  in  the 

new  frame  of  reference.     The  result  indicates  that  the  effect 

of  a  motion  with  velocity  v  opposite  to   that   of  the  light 

shortens  the  apparent  period  in  the  ratio  (i  —  v\c)\l. 

38.  THE  CONVECTION  -COEFFICIENT  IN  A  DISPERSIVE 
MEDIUM. 

In  treating  of  the  convection-coefficient  in  §  36,  yu,  was 
defined  by  the  fact  that  c/p  was  the  velocity  of  the  disturbance 
when  the  medium  was  treated  as  stationary.  In  a  dispersive 
medium  //,  is  a  function  of  the  period  of  the  light.  The  value 
to  be  taken  in  the  formula  obtained  is  clearly  that  cor- 
responding to  the  period  r  as  seen  by  the  observer  to  whom 
the  medium  is  stationary.  But  the  period  of  the  light  as 
observed  in  Fizeau's  experiment  is  T',  that  which  is  apparent 
to  the  observer  relative  to  whom  the  medium  is  moving  with 
velocity  v. 

By  the  same  method  as  in  the  last  section  we  obtain 


T(I . 

CJllJ 


If  fj!  is  the  index  corresponding  to  r 

>  /  /          ^u, 

p   -  ^  =  (T  _  T)    r 

c)r 

V/JLT    TH/J, 

" 


-ru  C         C  (          VT  (>/i\ 

Thus  -  =  -  (  I  -  -  -  V1  ). 

/JL       IJL  \          c    OT/ 


44 


RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 


Hence        f  +  v  (l  -  1\  =  4  +  v(i  -  L 

LL  \  U?/  LL  \  U? 

In  the  last  term  we  may  neglect  the  difference  between  p 
and  //,'. 

The  additional  term  in  the  coefficient  of  v  increases  the 
theoretical  value  of  the  convection-coefficient  in  the  case  ex- 
amined by  Michelson  and  Morley  to  '451,  but  this  is  still  well 
within  the  limits  indicated  by  their  experiments,  namely, 
•442  _+  -02.  Zeeman l  has  more  recently  performed  some 
further  very  careful  experiments  with  light  of  different  colours 
with  a  view  to  confirming  the  formula  last  given.  He  has 
succeeded  in  showing  a  dispersive  effect  agreeing  very  closely 
with  the  above  formula. 

In  the  following  table,  the  values  of  the  convection-coeffi- 
cient are  given ;  in  the  first  column,  according  to  Fresnel's 
formula  (eF),  in  the  second,  according  to  the  formula  here  given 
(eL),  and,  in  the  last,  the  value  experimentally  found. 


Wave-length  in  A° 

«F 

«L 

6EXP. 

4500 

0*443 

0-464 

0-465 

4580 

0-442 

0-463 

0-463 

546i 

0-439 

OH54 

0-45I 

6870 

o'435 

0*447 

0-447 

39.  THE  CONTRACTION  IN  VOLUME  OF  A  MOVING  BODY. 

It  follows  at  once  from  the  formula  obtained  above  that  if 
a  body,  all  of  whose  points  have  the  same  velocity,  has  a 
volume  V0  when  it  is  considered  to  be  at  rest,  and  volumes 
V,  V  when  its  velocities  are  u  and  u  respectively,  then 

V  =  V0(i  -  u2fc^,  V  =  V0(i  -tf'V).* 

Now  if  u  is  the  velocity  obtained  from  the  velocity  u  by  the 
equations  (A),  we  find  on  substitution  from  the  addition  for- 
mula that 


"Amst.  Proc."  x'vu.  (1914),  p.  445;   xvm.  (1916),  p.  398  and  p.  1240. 


THE  RELATIVITY  OF  SPACE  AND  TIME  45 


which  leads  to          ^ 

so  that  V/V  =  /3(l  -  vux\c^  .     fr) 

This  equation  gives  us  the  contraction  in  a  volume  which  is 
not  at  rest  in  either  frame  of  reference.  It  will  be  of  import- 
ance when  we  come  to  consider  later  whether  the  measure  of 
an  electric  charge  is  an  absolute  or  relative  magnitude  (p.  49). 


CHAPTER    IV. 

THE  RELATIVITY  OF  THE  ELECTRO-MAGNETIC 
VECTORS. 

40.  THE  DEFINITIONS  OF  ELECTRIC  AND  MAGNETIC 
INTENSITIES. 

IN  the  ordinary  treatment  of  electrical  theory  the  definitions 
given  of  the  electric  and  magnetic  intensities  at  a  point  are 
somewhat  as  follows  : — 

The  '  electric  intensity '  is  the  force  which  would  be 
exerted  per  unit  charge  on  a  small  charged  body  placed  at 
rest  at  the  point. 

The  '  magnetic  intensity '  is  definable  from  the  law  that 
the  force  per  unit  charge  on  a  small  moving  charged  body 
is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  electric  intensity  and  the  vector 
product l  of  the  velocity  and  the  magnetic  intensity. 

An  alternative  definition  of  the  magnetic  intensity  is  often 
given  as  the  force  per  unit  pole  on  a  magnetic  pole  placed 
at  the  point.  As  this  introduces  the  non-existent  isolated 
magnetic  pole,  it  will  be  as  well  to  confine  the  discussion  to 
the  former  definition. 

We  see  that,  apart  from  the  fact  that  the  measurement 
introduces  a  reference  to  the  mechanical  category  of  '  force,' 
the  definitions  involve  the  knowledge  of  the  velocity  of  the 
small  test  body.  But  we  have  already  learned  to  look  upon 
the  velocity  of  a  body  as  a  quantity  which,  physically,  is  so 
far  indeterminate.  To  assign  a  definite  value  to  it  we  have 
to  decide  which  of  all  possible  frames  of  reference  we  will 
adopt.  Thus  the  definitions  of  the  electric  and  magnetic  .  in- 
tensities are  relative  ones ;  their  values  are  '  relative  '  in  the 
same  sense  as  the  measures  of  space  and  time. 

We  need  therefore  to  add  to  the  relation  (A)  (p.  34),  a  re- 
lation between  the  values  assigned  to  the  electric  and  magnetic 

1  See  note  on  vectors,  p.  I. 
46 


RELATIVITY  OF  ELECTRO-MAGNETIC  VECTORS      47 

vectors  in  two  different  systems  of  reference.  We  cannot 
obtain  this  from  the  definitions  given  just  now,  because  they 
involve  the  conception  of  '  force,'  and  we  have  not  yet  seen 
whether  this  is  to  be  looked  upon  also  as  a  relative  or  ab- 
solute quantity.  We  shall  see  as  a  matter  of  fact  when  we 
come  to  the  consideration  of  dynamical  quantities  that  we  are 
bound  to  treat  it  as  relative. 

In  order  therefore  to  obtain  the  required  relations  we 
must  adopt  the  same  method  as  that  used  above  in  respect  of 
space  and  time,  and  consider  the  measures  of  these  quantities 
in  the  light  of  the  laws  in  which  they  occur,  the  laws  which 
express  the  uniformities  which  we  believe  on  experimental 
grounds  to  hold  between  electrical  phenomena. 

These  laws  are  the  equations  of  the  electro-magnetic  field. 
We  will  take  them  in  the  form  adopted  by  Lorentz,1  namely, 


i/3e 

Is 


=  curl  h          .          .         I 
o  =  div  h  II 

_  i —  =  curl  e          .  •  III 

c  <>/ 

p  =  dive  e         .         .     IV 

where  e  and  h  are  the  electric  and  magnetic  intensities,  and 
p  is  the  density  of  charge. 

The  fifth  equation  of  Lorentz's  theory, 

F  =  e  +  [uh]/r 

where  F  is  the  *  mechanical  force '  per  unit  of  charge  moving 
with  velocity  u,  embodies  the  definitions  given  above,  and 
supplies  us  with  a  means  of  connecting  up  with  mechanical 
theory,  but  gives  us  no  criterion  about  the  purely  electrical 
magnitudes,  the  mechanical  categories  now  occupying  a  de- 
rivative place. 

41.  THE  INVARIANT  FORM  OF  THE  FUNDAMENTAL 
EQUATIONS. 

The  first  thing  that  may  be  noticed  about  the  form  of  the 
equations  I-IV,  is  that  if  we  change  the  scale  on  which  we 

1  The  units  here  used  are  those  of  Lorentz.     See  "  Theory  of  Electrons," 
Leipzig,  1909,  p.  5. 


48 


RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 


measure  e  and  h,  we  alter  the  scale  on  which  we  measure  p  in 
the  same  ratio.  Thus  it  becomes  possible  to  limit  the  con- 
sideration to  such  changes  of  the  variables  as  leave  the  charge 
carried  by  any  particular  element  of  volume  unaltered. 

The  fundamental  hypothesis  of  electrical  theory  which  takes 
the  place  of  the  Newtonian  conception  of  'conservation  of 
mass '  is  that  of  '  conservation  of  electric  charge  '.  We  pro- 
ceed to  examine,  therefore,  whether  it  is  possible  to  make  such 
changes  in  the  variables  e  and  h,  when  we  change  the  space- 
time  co-ordinates  according  to  the  transformation  (A),  that  the 
form  of  the  equations  I -I  V  may  be  unaltered  and  at  the  same 
time  the  charge  carried  by  any  particular  element  of  volume  may 
be  unaltered.  The  Principle  of  Relativity  sprang  from  the 
discovery  that  it  is  possible  to  satisfy  these  requirements.1 

The  following  are  the  equations  which  give  us  the  neces- 
sary changes  in  the  vectors  e  and  h  : — 

-  vhz\c\  ez  =  f$(ez  +  vhy\c] 
+  vez\c),  hz  =  $(hx  -  vey\c) 
If  we  take  the  equations  of  Lorentz  and  make  the  changes 
of  variables  given  by  (A)  and  (B),  we  arrive  directly  at  the 
equations 

.       II' 
.     Ill' 
IV 


ev  = 


o  =  div'  h'  . 

I^-curfrf. 
c  ^ 

=  div'  e'    . 


where  u'  is  a  velocity  whose  components  are 


—   V 


*   I  -«,„/«» 

and  p  is  defined  by  the  equation 

p  =  £p(l  -  vux\<*)  .- 

1  A.  Einstein,  "  Ann.  der  Phys.,"  17,  1905,  pp.  891-7. 


(a) 


(C) 


RELATIVITY  OF  ELECTRO-MAGNETIC  VECTORS     49 

In  order  to  see  the  significance  of  these  quantities  u'  and  p, 
we  must  recall  one  or  two  of  the  immediate  consequences  of 
the  change  in  the  manner  in  which  space  is  measured  from 
the  co-ordinates  (x,  y,  z,  t)  to  (#•',  y,  z\  /). 

We  have  seen,  (p.  39)  that  the  equations  (a)  are  exactly 
those  which  connect  the  estimates  of  the  velocities  of  a  mov- 
ing point  as  measured  in  the  two  systems  respectively. 

We  have  also  seen,  (7),  p.  45,  that  if  SV  is  the  volume  of  a 
small  region  of  a  body  moving  with  velocity  u  as  measured 
in  (x,  y,  z,  t\  and  SV,  u'  are  the  corresponding  volume  and 
velocity  as  measured  in  (x ,  y,  z ,  t'}  then 

8V  =  8V/£(i  -  vux\c^. 
If  we  put  this  equation  and  (C)  together  we  obtain 

p'SV'  =  pSV. 

Thus  the  equation  (C)  is  exactly  that  which  is  required  to 
express  that  the  charges  in  the  corresponding  elements  of  volume 
are  the  same. 

The  equations  (A),  (B),  (C)  then  effect  an  exact  transforma- 
tion of  the  fundamental  equations  I-IV  into  equations  of  the 
same  form,  and  are  consistent  with  a  unique  value  being 
assigned  to  any  element  of  charge.  We  say  that  '  the  charge 
is  an  invariant*. 

42.  THE  CONSEQUENCE  OF  THIS  TRANSFORMATION. 

The  result  of  the  exactness  of  this  transformation  is  that, 
so  long  as  we  are  dealing  with  phenomena  of  which  the  sole 
laws  are  the  field  equations  in  the  form  which  we  have  taken, 
we  shall  not  be  able  to  discriminate  between  one  set  of  space- 
time  co-ordinates  and  another,  as  the  only  one  relative  to  which 
the  laws  have  the  required  form.  In  other  words,  remembering 
that  as  we  know  it,  the  aether  is  simply  the  frame  of  reference 
relative  to  which  these  equations  hold,  as  long  as  we  are 
dealing  with  phenomena  which  are  entirely  governed  by  these 
laws,  we  can  never  expect  to  identify  the  aether.  Unless  we  can 
light  on  some  measurable  phenomena  which  are  not  subject 
to  these  field  equations  alone,  the  aether  remains  an  unknown 
frame  of  reference,  exactly  as  the  frame  of  reference  for  the 
laws  of  dynamics  is  indeterminate. 

4 


So         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

Lorentz  remarks  that  it  is  really  a  matter  of  personal 
predisposition  whether  this  leads  a  physicist  to  deny  the 
existence  of  the  aether  or  to  the  more  agnostic  position 
which  merely  says  that  "the  aether  is  real  but  will  always 
be  hidden  from  our  knowledge".  This  may  be  so,  but 
few  to  whom  the  means  of  the  propagation  of  electrical  effects, 
and,  indeed,  the  whole  structure  of  matter  is  a  question  of 
the  first  interest,  will  feel  content  to  take  either  of  these  posi- 
tions. If  the  aether,  in  the  ordinary  sense  of  a  stationary 
medium,  does  not  exist,  what  is  it  that  conveys  the  waves  of 
light  through  space  ?  If  it  does  exist,  is  it  a  pure  accident 
that  its  laws  are  of  such  a  form  that  it  must  for  ever  remain 
concealed ;  or  is  it  that  we  have  naturally  lighted  first  on 
those  aspects  of  its  working  which,  as  being  independent  of 
motion  through  it,  would  be  most  readily  found  by  an  observer 
who  did  not  know  his  velocity  through  it  ? 1 

In  any  case,  the  impression  made  by  the  situation  is  that 
there  is  a  break  in  our  knowledge.  The  Principle  of 
Relativity  represents  an  attempt  to  see  what  are  the  con- 
clusions to  be  drawn  from  an  admission  of  our  inability  to 
identify  the  aether,  in  the  hope  that  it  may  throw  light  on 
the  question  where  we  are  to  look  for  the  way  out  of  this 
difficulty.  In  order  to  see  at  what  point  the  Principle  is  an 
independent  hypothesis,  something  which  is  not  contained 
in  a  purely  mathematical  result  arising  out  of  the  particular 
form  of  a  set  of  equations,  we  must  go  a  little  further,  and 
consider  the  way  in  which  the  electron  theory  professes  to 
give  an  account  of  the  structure  of  matter. 

43.  THE  METHOD  OF  COINCIDENCES  IN  EXPERIMENTAL 

OBSERVATION. 

The  fact  that  we  cannot  have  a  unique  measure  of  the  elec- 
tric and  magnetic  intensities  may  perhaps  be  a  little  more  readily 
accepted  if  we  consider  that  in  practice  we  never  really  profess 
to  measure  them  directly.  When  we,  for  example,  measure 
an  electric  potential  by  means  of  an  electrometer,  the  only 
actual  observation  is  one  of  a  configuration  of  relative  equili- 

1  This  is  suggestive  of  Prof.  Eddington's  observation  in  regard  to  the 
general  principle  of  relativity — "  Space,  Time,  and  Gravitation,  p.  201 :  "  The 
mind  has  but  regained  from  nature  that  which  the  mind  has  put  into  nature." 


RELATIVITY  OF  ELECTRO-MAGNETIC  VECTORS      51 

brium.  We  observe  the  coincidence  of  a  pointer  or  of  a  spot 
of  light  with  a  certain  mark  on  a  scale.  Only  by  eliminating 
the  uncertain  factor  of  human  judgment  of  an  interval  of 
space  and  time  is  it  possible  to  make  accurate  measurements. 
We  make  our  instruments  do  all  the  observing  for  us.  Then 
if  we  want  to  interpret  the  indications  of  the  instrument  in 
terms  of  the  values  of  the  strength  of  an  electric  field,  or  of  an 
electric  current  or  the  like,  we  have  to  do  so  by  means  of 
exactly  those  theoretical  equations  which  we  have  seen  to 
have  a  purely  relative  significance. 

Now  it  is  a  fundamental  property  of  the  systems  of  co- 
ordinates that  we  have  been  considering,  that  events  which 
are  simultaneous  and  coincident  in  space  at  a  given  instant 
in  a  given  set  of  co-ordinates  are  also  simultaneous  and  coinci- 
dent in  any  other  of  the  sets  of  co-ordinates.  To  a  given  set  of 
values  of  (x>  y,  z,  t)  there  is  only  one  value  of  each  of  the  co- 
ordinates (^',y,  z ,  t'\  and  these  values  do  not  depend  upon  any 
particular  circumstances  associated  with  the  place  or  instant. 
Thus  if  we  read  an  electrometer,  the  coincidence  of  pointer 
and  a  certain  mark  on  the  scale  does  not  depend  on  the  frame 
of  reference  that  we  are  using.  But  the  significance  that  we 
attach  to  the  observation  does  do  so.  The  quantitative  de- 
scription of  the  state  of  an  electrical  system  depends  on  the 
frame  of  reference  used ;  the  nature  of  this  dependence  is  limited 
by  the  fact  that  the  laws  of  the  field  are  to  be  independent  of 
the  choice  of  the  frame  of  reference,  and  this  means  that  the 
estimates  of  electric  and  magnetic  force  for  two  different  frames 
of  reference  will  be  related  in  exactly  the  way  represented 
by  the  equations  (B)  which  are  necessary  for  the  preservation 
of  the  form  of  the  laws. 

44.  THE  INCOMPLETENESS  OF  PURELY  ELECTRICAL 

SCHEMES  OF  THE  CONSTITUTION  OF  MATTER. 
The  foundation  of  the  electron  theory  of  matter  is  the 
scheme  olTequations  which  has  been  considered  in  the  preced- 
ing sections.     But  there  are  certain  other  hypotheses  that 
have  to  be  added  to  those  general  laws. 

The  first  is  that  of  '  the  atomic  nature  of  electricity '.  The 
negative  '  electrons '  are  supposed  to  be  small  discrete  nuclei, 

4* 


52         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

of  identical  structure  and  charge.  It  is  not  necessary  here  to 
go  into  the  evidence  for  this.  The  magnitude  of  these  nuclei 
is  not  definitely  known  ;  it  is  only  possible  for  us  to  construct 
tentative  theories  as  to  their  exact  structure.  For  certain  pur- 
poses we  may  be  able  to  treat  them  as  points,  for  others  we 
may  need  to  adopt  some  provisional  conception  of  their  extent 
and  constitution.  For  the  present  so  little  is  known  about 
the  properties  of  positive  electricity  that  we  must  be  content  to 
admit  that  it  is  by  no  means  certain  that  a  similar  statement 
of  the  identity  of  the  elementary  quanta  of  positive  electricity 
is  possible. 

The  picture  which  we  have  of  the  constitution  of  a  portion 
of  matter  is  one  in  which  these  electrons  are  grouped  and  held 
together  in  a  permanent  configuration ;  not  in  a  static  state, 
but  in  a  state  of  motion ;  the  motion  of  each  electron  is  gov- 
erned by  certain  laws  of  which  the  theoretical  equations  that 
have  been  already  referred  to  are  a  partial  expression. 

As  they  stand  it  is  impossible  for  them  to  be  the  complete 
scheme  of  laws.  For  it  is  easily  seen  that  they  are  not  mathe- 
matically sufficient  to  determine,  from  a  knowledge  of  the 
whole  field  at  any  given  instant,  the  way  in  which  the  field 
and  the  distribution  of  charge  will  vary  through  all  time. 
The  equations  II  and  IV  (p.  45)  are  not  independent  of  I 
and  III,1  so  that  we  really  have  only  two  vector  equations 
connecting  the  three  vectors  e,  h,  and  u,  p  being  connected 

1  From  III,  since  div  curl  e  =  o  (see  note  on  Vector  Analysis,  p.  i),  we  have 
2-  div  h  =  o,  showing  that  at  a  given  point  div  h  has  a  constant  value.  If  at  any 

preceding  time  there  was  no  field,  this  constant  value  must  be  zero.  Thus  Eqn. 
II  is  deduced  from  III.  From  I  and  IV  we  obtain 

£-  (div  e)  +  div  (pu)  =  o, 

ot 

or  2?  +  div  (pu)  =  o. 

ot 

This  is  what  is  commonly  known  as  the  equation  of  continuity  or  of  conservation 
of  electricity.  Integrated  through  a  closed  volume  it  gives— 


that  is,  the  rate  of  loss  of  electricity  included  in  volume  is  exactly  accounted  for 
by  the  outward  flow  over  the  surface ;  there  is  no  creation  or  destruction  of 
electricity. 


RELATIVITY  OF  ELECTRO-MAGNETIC  VECTORS      53 

with  u  by  the  condition  of  *  the  conservation  of  electricity/ 
which  requires  that  the  change  in  the  distribution  of  electricity 
takes  place  entirely  by  convection. 

We  cannot  therefore  pretend  that  our  scheme  of  the  struc- 
ture of  matter  is  even  theoretically  complete  until  we  have 
added  to  the  general  equations  some  further  condition.  It  is 
just  at  this  point  that  the  structure  of  the  electron  has  to  be 
taken  into  account.  If  we  choose  to  assume  that  we  may 
neglect  its  dimensions,  and  treat  it  as  a  point  charge,  this  is  a 
sufficient  condition.1  The  quantity  p  is  then  everywhere  zero, 
and  the  solutions  of  the  equations  which  represent  the  field 
are  such  as  are  restricted  to  possess  singularities  of  a  certain 
definite  type.  But  as  a  matter  of  fact  this  is  not  a  possible 
way  of  building  up  a  practical  theory  because  it  introduces 
mathematical  difficulties  in  the  very  simplification  of  ignoring 
the  dimensions  of  the  electron.  The  specification  of  the  exact 
way  in  which  the  electric  and  magnetic  forces  become  infinite 
in  the  neighbourhood  of  a  point-electron  is  a  matter  of  consider- 
able difficulty,  and  the  only  way  of  avoiding  this  is  to  assume 
the  electron  to  have  a  structure  of  finite  size,  and  to  assume 
some  definite  relation  between  the  distribution  of  charge 
through  its  volume,  and  the  quantities  e,  h,  and  u.  Such  a 
hypothesis  will  be  purely  empirical  ;  it  must  be  chosen  ac- 
cording to  the  indications  which  we  have  of  facts  that  are 
not  explained  by  the  general  equations. 

So  the  question  arises :  "  What  light  is  thrown  by  experi- 
ment on  the  structure  of  the  electron?"  This  question  has 
been  rather  obscured  recently  by  the  more  tangible  one  of 
the  structure  of  the  atom  as  a  group  of  electrons ;  but  this 
has  only  become  possible  because,  on  any  theory  of  the  consti- 
tution of  the  electron,  its  extreme  minuteness  does  allow  of 
it  being  treated  for  some  purposes  as  a  material  particle  of 
definite  mass  and  charge,  so  that  it  is  amenable  to  ordinary 
mechanical  treatment. 

It  would  seem  that  if  the  structure  of  the  electron  can  be 
ignored  in  problems  of  the  atom,  it  would  a  fortiori  be  so  in 
the  discussion  of  the  grouping  of  atoms  to  form  matter.  But 

1  As  in  Larmor's  "  /Ether  and  Matter". 


54         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

in  the  particular  problem  which  we  are  considering,  namely, 
the  failure  of  experiment  to  determine  uniquely  the  frame  of 
reference  which  we  call  the  aether,  this  is  not  so.  For  the 
preceding  analysis  of  the  fundamental  equations  has  shown  us 
that  this  failure  arises  partly  because  the  equations  of  the 
electric  field  have  a  form  which  is  invariant  under  a  certain 
transformation.  We  are  thus  able  to  form  any  number  of 
pictures  of  a  given  field,  each  using  a  different  frame  of  re- 
ference, and  each  subject  to  the  same  fundamental  equations. 
But  if  we  wish  to  extend  our  picture  so  as  to  take  in  not  only 
the  sethereal  field  but  the  whole  of  the  matter  with  which  it 
is  in  interaction,  it  is  necessary  that  any  further  hypotheses, 
introduced  to  supplement  the  equations  of  the  field  to  obtain 
a  complete  scheme  for  the  determination  of  the  configuration 
and  motion  of  the  various  parts  of  the  matter,  must  also  be  of 
such  form  that  they  too  are  independent  of  the  particular 
frame  of  reference  that  is  adopted. 

In  order  to  illustrate  this  point  we  may  consider  a  little 
more  in  detail  the  explanations  offered  by  Lorentz  of  the 
failure  of  specific  experiments,  as  representing  the  point  of 
view  of  one  who  thinks  in  terms  of  the  actual  existence  of  a 
unique  stationary  aether.  (Cf.  Chapter  II.)  ' 

45.  THE  EXPERIMENT  OF  MICHELSON  AND  MORLEY. 

We  have  already  seen  that  the  failure  of  this  experiment  to 
discover  any  trace  of  a  motion  relative  to  the  aether  can  be 
completely  accounted  for  by  the  hypothesis  of  a  contraction 
of  the  apparatus.  The  magnitude  of  this  contraction  is 
exactly  that  which  is  apparent  when,  the  body  being  sup- 
posed unaltered,  the  frame  of  reference  is  changed  according 
to  the  transformation  of  Einstein.  What  reasons  are  given 
for  supposing  that  the  body  will  actually  undergo  this  con- 
traction when  its  velocity  relative  to  a  fixed  frame  of  reference 
is  changed? 

The  argument,  relieved  of  the  mathematical  details,  is  as 
follows :  When  a  body  is  at  rest  in  the  aether  each  electron 
within  it  has  a  specific  motion  determined  according  to 
certain  laws.  If  we  know  these  motions  completely  we  can 


RELATIVITY  OF  ELECTRO-MAGNETIC  VECTORS      55 

by  means  of  the  space-time  correlation  build  up  a  picture  of 
another  system  which  is  moving  as  a  whole  with  velocity  v 
relative  to  the  same  aether  ;  in  this  the  motion  of  any  particular 
electron  is  obtained  from  that  of  the  corresponding  electron 
in  the  original  body  by  merely  turning  the  relations  between 
(xt  y,  z)  and  /  that  express  the  way  in  which  it  moves  into 
relations  connecting  (x,y,  z}  with  /.  If  this  is  done  it  is 
clear  that  the  configuration  of  the  body  as  a  whole  in  the  new 
picture  is  exactly  that  of  the  original  body  contracted  in 
the  ratio  I  :  (i  -  z/2/^)*,  as  on  page  36.  But,  the  argument 
goes  on,  the  electro-magnetic  field  of  the  electrons  in  the 
new  body  satisfies  the  same  fundamental  laws  as  that  of 
the  original  body,  and  is  therefore  equally  capable  of  exist- 
ing. Thus  if  these  were  the  only  laws  in  question  we  should 
be  fairly  justified  in  concluding  that  the  original  body  would 
automatically  change  into  the  one  of  which  we  have  so  formed 
a  picture  when  it  is  set  in  motion  with  the  velocity  v.1 

46.  INCOMPLETENESS  OF  THE  ARGUMENT  FOR  THE 
FITZGERALD  CONTRACTION. 

It  is  clear  that  there  are  two  gaps  in  this  argument.  First, 
there  is  the  obvious  restriction  that  it  must  be  assumed  that, 
provided  that  the  acceleration  of  the  body  is  sufficiently  slow, 
so  as  not  to  produce  mechanical  distortion,  change  of  tempera- 
ture or  other  disturbances,  there  is  a  unique  configuration  for 
a  given  grouping  of  electrons  moving  as  a  whole  with  a  given 
velocity  relative  to  the  aether.  This  does  not  seem  to  offer 
any  serious  difficulty,  though  it  must  be  remembered  that  the 
external  configuration  of  a  material  body  must  be  thought  of 
as  a  statistical  one ;  that  is,  in  view  of  a  probable  kinetic  con- 
stitution, to  a  fixed  external  configuration  will  correspond  a 
multitude  of  rapidly  changing  distributions  of  electrons  in  the 
interior  ;  but  this  will  not  be  considered  here.  The  more  im- 
portant point  for  discussion  is  that  the  correlation  which  has 
been  shown  to  exist  in  the  case  of  the  *  field  equations/  must 
be  assumed  to  hold  for  all  the  other  relations  which  play  a 
part  in  determining  the  motions  of  the  electrons. 

1  Cf.  also  "  jEther  and  Matter,"  p.  176, 


56         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

It  has  been  remarked  that  it  is  enough  for  the  purpose  in 
hand  to  supplement  the  field  equations  by  a  hypothetical  rela- 
tion between  the  distribution  of  the  charge  that  constitutes 
the  electron  and  its  velocity.  If  this  is  done,  it  must  be  a 
relation  which  maintains  its  form  in  the  correlated  moving 
system  that  we  have  built  up.  Since  it  is  a  purely  geometri- 
cal relation  it  must  be  a  relation  which  is  invariant  under,  or  is 
a  consequence  of,  the  fundamental  transformation  (A).  Hence 
Lorentz's  assumption  that  the  electron,  which  is  naturally 
thought  of  as  symmetrical  round  a  centre  when  it  is  at  rest, 
is,  when  in  motion,  of  spheroidal  shape,  being  obtained 
from  the  spherical  stationary  electron  by  the  simple  appli- 
cation to  it  of  the  FitzGerald  contraction.  If  this  is  not 
assumed,  the  correlation  between  the  stationary  and  the  mov- 
ing system  is  not  perfect,  and  we  have  no  reason,  therefore, 
for  thinking  that  the  desired  contraction  of  the  whole  body 
will  take  place. 

Thus  the  whole  explanation  reduces  to  the  formation 
of  a  conception  of  the  electron,  which  really  embodies  the 
fact  that  we  are  trying  to  explain.  The  origin  of  the  con- 
traction is  left  in  obscurity.  The  conception  is  only  arrived 
at  by  assuming  the  result  of  the  experiment  to  be,  not  an 
accident  arising  out  of  the  particular  circumstances  of  the 
case,  but  inherent  in  the  constitution  of  matter  down  to  its 
most  minute  elements.  In  other  words,  the  formation  of  this 
conception  of  the  electron  is  itself  a  direct  application  of  the 
Principle  of  Relativity. 

47.  THE  EXPERIMENTS  OF  RAYLEIGH  AND  BRACE. 

If  we  adopt  the  conception  of  the  electron  that  has  been 
described  there  is  no  need  to  go  any  further  into  the  details 
of  any  phenomena  which  are  explicable  in  terms  of  the  motions 
of  electrons  within  a  body  in  order  to  be  sure  that  we  shall 
not  be  able  to  obtain  a  positive  effect  due  to  the  motion  of 
bodies  through  the  aether.  For  as  we  have  already  remarked 
more  than  once,  the  adoption  of  a  definite  relation  between 
the  velocity  and  the  configuration  of  the  electron,  so  that  the 
latter  is  determined  uniquely  by  the  former,  makes  the  scheme 


RELATIVITY  OF  ELECTRO-MAGNETIC  VECTORS      57 

of  the  laws  of  the  motions  of  the  electrons  complete,  and  the 
whole  scheme  is  now  a  relative  one ;  the  sether  is  completely 
concealed. 

It  may,  however,  help  to  make  the  consequences  of  the 
conception  clearer  if  we  consider  specially  some  of  those  results 
of  it ;  especially  some  which  directly  affect  certain  experiments 
which  were  devised  to  detect  effects  which,  it  was  thought, 
would  follow  from  the  contraction  hypothesis. 

It  occurred  to  Lord  Rayleigh  that  a  shrinkage  of  a  trans- 
parent body  in  one  direction  would  cause  it  to  cease  to  be 
isotropic,  and  that  therefore  there  might  arise  a  double  re- 
fraction of  a  beam  of  light  traversing  it  in  a  direction  across 
the  line  of  the  motion.  This  was  demurred  to  by  Sir  Joseph 
Larmor  when  the  paper  was  read  in  1902  at  the  British  As- 
sociation meeting  on  the  ground  of  an  argument  similar  to 
that  given  above.  But  the  experiment  was  carried  out  again 
with  extreme  refinement  by  Brace  in  1906,  the  only  result 
being  a  complete  fulfilment  of  the  prediction  of  its  failure. 

The  mechanism  of  refraction  as  ordinarily  conceived  is  that 
the  light  waves  travelling  through  the  body  set  in  vibration 
the  electrons  which  go  to  make  up  the  atoms,  and  their  inertia, 
number,  and  distribution  determine  the  amount  of  the  refrac- 
tion. If  these  are  not  isotropically  disposed  the  body  will 
produce  a  different  refraction  for  different  directions  of  the 
components  of  the  electric  force  in  the  wave,  and  so  a  double 
refraction  will  arise.  Now,  Lorentz l  was  able  to  show  that, 
starting  from  the  conception  of  the  electron  which  he  had  de- 
veloped, the  effective  inertia  of  an  electron  is  not  the  same  for 
all  directions.  On  allowing  for  this  it  appears  that  the  in- 
equality in  the  inertia  is  exactly  of  that  amount  which  is  re- 
quired to  neutralize  the  inequality  in  distribution  produced  by 
the  contraction  of  the  body.  This,  of  course,  in  the  light  of 
what  we  have  said  above,  is  exactly  what  we  should  expect. 

48.  THE  EXPERIMENT  OF  TROUTON  AND  RANKINE. 

In  spite  of  the  results  of  earlier  experiments  and  of  the 
theory  of  Lorentz  and  Larmor  it  still  seemed  to  some  that 

1  "  Theory  of  Electrons,"  p.  217. 


58         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

there  might  be  need  of  putting  the  matter  to  a  further  test. 
Again  reasoning  from  the  FitzGerald  contraction  as  producing 
a  lack  of  isotropy  in  a  body,  Professor  Trouton  l  suggested  that 
there  might  be  a  difference  of  electrical  conductivity  in  dif- 
ferent directions  in  a  conducting  body  carried  along  with  the 
earth  through  the  aether. 

The  conductivity  of  a  body  like  its  refracting  power 
is  interpreted  in  terms  of  the  inertia  and  distribution  of 
electrons  which  move  within  the  body ;  and  again,  if  the 
difference  in  apparent  inertia  for  different  directions  is  taken 
into  account,  the  effect  of  the  contraction  on  the  distribu- 
tion is  annulled.  The  expectation  of  a  positive  effect  is 
therefore  unjustified,  as  we  might  predict  on  general  grounds 
without  any  calculation  of  the  inertia  of  the  electron  at  all. 
The  result  of  £he  experiment  again  verified  this  conclusion. 

49.  THE  EXPERIMENT  OF  TROUTON  AND  NOBLE.2 

In  this  experiment,  which  arose  out  of  a  suggestion  made 
by  FitzGerald,  a  parallel  plate  condenser  was  suspended  with 
the  plates  in  a  vertical  plane  and  capable  of  turning  about  a 

vertical  axis.  An  attempt 
was  made  to  detect  a  tend- 
ency for  the  condenser  to 
set  itself  in  a  definite  direc- 
tion when  charged.  This 
Fwas  expected  to  happen 
for  the  following  reason : 
If  a  charged  condenser  is 
in  motion  through  the 
FlG-  5-  aether,  the  electric  force 

between  the  plates  being  E,  then  a  magnetic  force  is  set  up 
in  the  region  between  the  plates  equal  to  E^sin  0/c,  to  the 
first  order  in  (vjc\  where  v  is  the  velocity  of  the  condenser 
and  6  is  the  angle  between  the  normal  and  the  direction  of 
motion.  This  magnetic  field  makes  a  contribution  to  the 
energy  of  the  moving  system  proportional  to 

111  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.  "  (A),  8  (igo8),  p.  428. 
2"  Proc.  Roy.  Soc.,"  72  (1903),  p.  132. 


RELATIVITY  OF  ELECTRO-MAGNETIC  VECTORS      59 

But  in  addition  to  this  the  electric  force  between  the  plates 
is  altered  by  a  quantity  of  the  order  EV/^2,  and  so  there  is  a 
further  change  in  the  energy  which  is  also  of  the  order  E2t/2/^. 
A  calculation  gives  for  the  total  change  of  energy  the  quantity 

W  =  47rCV2(sin2  0  -  $v*/<? 

where  C  is  the  capacity  of  the  condenser  and  V  the  potential 
difference.  If  now  the  condenser  is  rotated  so  as  to  alter 
the  angle  6  without  altering  the  charge,  work  will  -have  to 
be  done  in  changing  the  energy;  this  indicates  that  there 

d'W 

is   a  couple   acting  on   the  condenser   of   magnitude —^~ 

au 

that  is,  -  8-TrCV2  sin#  cos#  v2/<?.  This  couple  vanishes  if 
0  is  equal  either  to  o  or  to  ^TT  ;  that  is  if  the  condenser  is 
either  normal  or  parallel  to  the  direction  of  motion,  the 
stable  position  being  that  in  which  the  energy  is  a  minimum, 
that  is,  when  the  condenser  is  normal  to  the  velocity. 

The  method  of  observation  was  to  reverse  the  charge  of 
the  condenser  at  regular  intervals  of  time  equal  to  half  the 
time  of  the  natural  period  of  swing  of  the  condenser.  By  this 
means  it  was  hoped  that  the  cumulative  effect  of  the  alternat- 
ing couple  would  gradually  set  up  a  measureable  swing  in  the 
system.  The  experiment  was  tried  at  different  times  of  day 
so  as  to  ensure  that  by  no  accident  the  actual  velocity  of  the 
earth  relative  to  the  aether  was  normal  to  the  plane  of  the 
condenser ;  but  no  effect  could  be  detected  in  any  case. 

If  the  reasoning  whereby  we  were  led  to  anticipate  this 
result  is  correct,  the  expression  for  the  energy,  which  is  ob- 
tained after  allowing  for  the  FitzGerald  contraction,  leads  to  a 
disagreement  between  the  result  of  experiment  and  the  con- 
clusions drawn  from  applying  the  ordinary  mechanical  prin- 
ciples. This  brings  us  to  the  point  that  was  overlooked  by 
the  designers  of  the  experiment.  In  experiments  which  take 
account  of  the  second  order  in  vjc,  the  Newtonian  mechanics 
require  correction.  This  is  clear  from  the  case  of  the  electron 
that  has  already  been  referred  to.  The  apparent  inertia  being 
different  in  different  directions,  the  force  on  the  electron  is 
not  in  the  direction  of  its  acceleration.  It  will  clearly  be  a 
matter  of  some  difficulty  to  derive  from  a  constitutive  theory 


6o         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

of  matter  as  composed  of  electrons  of  Lorentz's  type  the 
general  way  in  which  the  dynamics  of  a  rigid  body  are  to  be 
modified.  The  only  feasible  way  of  finding  the  kind  of  correc- 
tion required  is  to  start  from  the  hypothesis  of  relativity  in 
the  new  sense,  not  in  the  old  dynamical  sense,  and  to  see  what 
is  the  simplest  modification  that  can  be  made  in  accordance 
with  it,  just  as  Lorentz's  conception  of  the  electron  is  the 
simplest  type  of  nucleus  that  can  be  devised  to  accord  with  it. 
Some  indication  of  the  solution  of  this  problem  will  be  given 
in  a  later  chapter,  where  a  fuller  discussion  of  the  experiment 
will  be  found.  (See  p.  8 1.) 


CHAPTER   V. 

MECHANICS  AND  THE  PRINCIPLE  OF  RELATIVITY. 

50.  THE  TRANSITION  FROM  ELECTRICAL  TO  MECHANICAL 

THEORY. 

IN  making  the  transition  from  the  purely  electrical  theory  that 
we  have  been  chiefly  considering  in  the  last  two  chapters  to 
mechanical  theory,  it  is  necessary  first  to  state  clearly  what  is 
the  connecting-link. 

We  might  follow  the  method  of  the  critical  school  which 
treats  of  force  as  a  mere  concept,  the  formation  of  which  is 
possible  on  account  of  the  physical  laws  of  conservation  of 
mass  and  momentum.  This  school  of  thought  begins  with 
the  hypothesis,  based  on  experience,  that  the  accelerations  of 
two  particles  which  act  on  one  another  are  in  a  constant  ratio. 
This  is,  in  effect,  Newton's  law  of  equal  and  opposite  action 
and  reaction,  combined  with  the  conception  of  a  mass-ratio  for 
two  particles  which  is  constant  and  independent  of  their  veloci- 
ties and  of  any  other  circumstances.  In  order  to  adapt  this 
hypothesis  to  the  requirements  of  the  Principle  of  Relativity, 
we  should  have  to  modify  it  in  such  a  way  that  the  kinematic 
law  which  we  put  in  its  place  has  a  form  which  remains  the 
same  when  we  change  by  a  JLorentz  transformation  from  one 
set  of  space-time  co-ordinates  to  another.  Having  done  this, 
we  might  define  the  force  acting  on  a  particle  in  a  convenient 
way,  and  hence  obtain  the  manner  in  which  we  conceive  the 
measure  or  direction  of  a  force  to  change  when  we  change 
the  frame  of  reference.  Then  subsequently  we  might  bring 
the  force,  as  so  defined,  into  relation  with  the  electrical  field 

61 


62         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

by  seeking  for  a  quantity  in  terms  of  the  electro-magnetic 
vectors  which  is  subject  to  the  same  transformation  as  that 
which  has  been  suggested  on  kinetic  grounds.  For  any 
equation  which  embodies  a  relation  actually  subsisting  in 
physical  phenomena  must,  according  to  the  Principle  of  Re- 
lativity, have  a  form  which  is  independent  of  the  particular 
frame  of  reference  employed. 

It  may  be  as  well  to  point  out  by  an  illustration  that 
some  modification  is  necessary. 

The  addition  equation  of  velocities  which  is  fundamental  in 
the  relativity  kinematics  renders  the  Newtonian  form  of  the 
equation  of  the  conservation  of  momentum  no  longer  possible. 
If  we  consider  two  particles  moving  in  a  straight  line  under 
no  forces  save  their  own  mutual  action,  we  have  the  equation 

constant. 


If  we  change  the  frame  of  reference,  by  the  use  of  the  equa- 
tion (a\  p.  39,  we  have  in  place  of  this 

«/  +  v  u.2'  +  v 

m,  —  -  —  ;  —  —  o  +  m9  —  -  —  ;  —  TO  =  constant, 

1  I  +    U^vl<?  2  I    +  UsV/<* 

which  is  of  an  entirely  different  form. 

It  is  not  easy,  without  further  analytical  assistance,  to  see 
in  what  way  the  original  equation  is  to  be  modified  in  order 
to  obtain  a  form  which  is  the  same  in  both  frames  of  reference. 
Minkowski  devised  an  analytical  method  of  great  power  and 
elegance  by  which  it  can  be  done  very  quickly.  To  this  we 
shall  come  in  the  next  chapter.  We  turn,  for  the  present,  to  a 
means  of  bridging  the  gap  between  electrical  and  mechanical 
theory,  which  is  nearer  to  that  which  has  been  usual  in  electro- 
dynamics, and  which  is  followed  by  Lorentz,  who  makes  the 
transition  by  introducing  the  expression  for  the  '  mechanical 
force  per  unit  charge,'  e  +  [uh]/£ 

51.  APPLICATION  OF  THE  LORENTZ  TRANSFORMATION; 
MOTION  OF  A  CHARGED  PARTICLE. 

We  adopt  this  definition  and  proceed  to  consider  the 
motion  of  a  charged  particle.  In  order  to  do  this  it  is  sufficient 


MECHANICS  AND  THE  PRINCIPLE  OF  RELATIVITY  63 

to  consider  a  transformation  between  two  systems,  in  one  of 
which  the  particle  is  instantaneously  at  rest.  We  shall  assume 
that  in  this  system  the  acceleration  of  the  particle  is  given  by 

q  e  =  m  t , 

q  being  the  charge  on  the  particle,  f  the  acceleration,  and  m 
being  a  definite  constant.  That  is,  we  assume  that  for  a 
particle  whose  velocity  may  be  neglected,  the  motion  is  given 
by  an  equation  of  the  ordinary  Newtonian  form,  m  being  the 
*  apparent  mass '  when  the  velocity  is  zero. 
Now,  if  we  take  the  addition  equations 


I  +  *J>f<r  p(I  +  */)\C)  P(l  +  uxv\c* 

and  assume  that  u  is  very  small,  these  give  us  to  the  first 
order  in  u 


ux'  =  v  +  ux(l  -  v2l<?),     Uy  =  Uylfr     «,'  =  uJ/3. 

Now,  let  us  suppose  that  the  velocity  u  is  the  velocity  com- 
municated to  the  particle  from  rest  in  a  short  time  St  ;  the 
corresponding  interval  of  time  in  the  other  frame  of  reference 
is  to  be  obtained  from  the  equation 

Sf  =  /3(St  +  v  Sx/c2) 

in  which  we  have  to  put  S*  equal  to  zero  since  the  velocity  of 
the  particle  is  momentarily  zero.  Thus 

M  =  /3  St. 

Hence,  dividing  the  increments  of  velocity  by  the  correspond- 
ing intervals  of  time,  we  have  for  the  relation  between  the 
expression  for  the  accelerations  in  the  two  systems 


But  we  have  also  from  the  transformation  of  the  electric  and 
magnetic  intensities, 


Thus  the  equations  of  motion  become 


64         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 


or,   introducing   the   '  force  '   vector   F'  =  (e'  +  [u'h]/f),  since 
u'  =  (v,  o,  o)  we  may  write  these  equations 


These  are  the  equations  which  are  satisfied  by  the  motion  of 
the  particle  relative  to  the  system  in  which  the  particle  has  a 
velocity  v  parallel  to  the  axis  of  x.  They  are  commonly  inter- 
preted by  saying  that  the  particle  has  a  '  longitudinal  mass  ' 
equal  to  @3m,  and  a  f  transverse  mass  '  equal  to  f$m  ;  the  word 
*  mass  '  being  understood  as  the  '  force  per  unit  of  accelera- 
tion produced,'  and  the  'force  per  unit  charge'  being  de- 
fined to  be  (e  +  [uh]/£). 

As  far  as  the  dynamics  of  the  particle  are  concerned,  the 
above  equations  rest  on  the  assumptions,  (i)  that  observations 
of  the  acceleration  of  a  charged  particle  by  an  electro-magnetic 
field  will  not  furnish  us  with  a  means  of  distinguishing  be- 
tween the  different  systems  of  co-ordinates  for  which  the  laws 
of  purely  electrical  phenomena  preserve  their  form  ;  and  (ii)  that 
if  the  velocity  of  a  particle  relative  to  the  frame  of  reference 
is  sufficiently  small,  the  law  of  its  motion  reduces  to  the  New- 
tonian form,  the  form  which  has  been  adopted  as  the  result 
of  the  observation  of  the  motions  of  bodies  whose  velocities 
relative  to  the  earth  are  all  very  small  compared  with  the 
velocity  of  light. 

52.  THE  EXPERIMENTS  ON  THE  DEVIATION  OF  THE 
£-RAYS  BY  AN  ELECTRO-MAGNETIC  FIELD. 

We  may  now  proceed  to  consider  what  light  is  thrown  upon 
the  equations  and  assumptions  that  have  been  written  down 
above  by  the  well-known  experiments  of  Kaufmann  and  others 
on  the  inertia  of  the  negative  electrons.  In  the  first  form  of 
these  experiments  a  stream  of  the  /3-rays  from  a  small  piece 
of  a  radio-active  substance  passes  through  a  fine  hole  in  a 
screen  and  impinges  on  a  photographic  plate.  Electric  and 


MECHANICS  AND  THE  PRINCIPLE  OF  RELATIVITY  65 

magnetic  fields  are  then  set  up  in  a  common  direction  at  right 
angles  to  the  stream  ;  it 
is    then  found  that,  in- 
stead   of    meeting    the 
screen  in  a  single  small 
spot,    the 
duces   on 


stream    pro- 
the    plate    a 
curved  trace. 

The  interpretation  of 
this  is  as  follows.  Sup- 
posing the  rays  to  con- 
sist of  a  stream  of  small 
charged  particles,  they 


FIG.  6. — Cj,  C8,  condenser ;  P,  photographic 
plate  ;  S,  S,  electro-magnet  ;  Ra, 
radium  fluoride. 


will  be  deflected  by  the  electric  and  magnetic  fields.  Let  us 
take  the  axis  of  x  to  be  in  the  direction  of  motion,  and  the  axis 
of  y  to  be  in  the  common  direction  of  the  fields  ;  let  the  accelera- 
tions in  the  directions  of  the  axes  of  y  and  z  be  fy  and  fgt  the 
velocity  along  the  axis  of  x  being  v\  then  if  /  is  the  distance 
traversed  through  the  field,  and  /  is  the  time  of  transit, 

/  =  vt\ 
and  the  deviations  in  the  directions  of  the  axes  of  y  and  z  are 

y 


The  measurement  of  the  deviations  y  and  z  on  the  photographic 
plate  thus  gives  the  values  offy/v2  and/Jv^. 

Let  E,  H  be  the  respective  intensities  of  the  electric  and 
magnetic  fields.  Then,  if  the  equations  obtained  above  are  a 
correct  representation  of  the  facts,  we  have,  since  with  the  given 
arrangement  the  components  of  F  are  (o,  E,  z/H/r), 


from  which  we  have 


Thus,  corresponding  to  any  particular  point  on  the  trace  of 
the  ray  on  the  plate,  we  can  obtain  an  estimate  of  the  velocity 
of  the  particles  which  strike  the  plate  at  that  point,  the  strengths 
of  the  fields  being  supposed  to  be  known.  We  are  then  able 

5 


66 


RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 


to  test  the  correctness  of  the  assumptions  that  led  to  the  above 
equations  by  means  of  either  equation.  The  first  gives  us 

q      &, 

m  ="   E  ' 

and  each  factor  on  the  right-hand  side  is  now  a  quantity  of 
which  we  have  an  estimate.  If  it  be  true  that  all  the  particles 
forming  the  stream  are  identical  in  nature,  then  the  values  of 
q\m  obtained  from  all  the  different  points  of  the  trace  of  the 
rays  on  the  plate  should  be  the  same. 

53.  THE  METHOD  OF  THE  CROSSED  FIELDS. 

An  improvement  on  this  method  was  introduced  by  Bestel- 
meyer.  '  It  is  now  known  as  the  method  of  '  crossed  fields '. 

s  .  s 


FIG.  7. 


S 


The  figure  shows  the  essential  parts  of  the  apparatus  as 
used  by  Bucherer  and  Wolz.  Q  and  C2  are  the  plates  of  a 
condenser,  consisting  of  two  parallel  optically- plane  plates  of 
glass  silvered  on  the  inner  side,  and  kept  at  a  fixed  very  small 
distance  (about  -25  mm.)  by  pieces  of  a  thin  sheet  of  quartz. 
R<z  is  a  grain  of  radium  fluoride  from  which  the  /3-rays  can 
pass  between  the  plates  of  the  condenser  to  strike  the  photo- 
graphic plate  P,  which  is  at  a  measurable  and  adjustable  dis- 
tance from  the  condenser.  The  whole  of  this  part  of  the 
apparatus  is  placed  transversely  inside  a  long  solenoid,  of  which 
the  rectangular  section  SSSS  is  shown  in  the  figure.  The 
electric  field  between  the  plates  of  the  condenser  and  the 


MECHANICS  AND  THE  PRINCIPLE  OF  RELATIVITY   67 

magnetic  field  due  to  the  solenoid  are  now  at  right  angles, 
and  the  /3-particles  move  across  them  both.  As  they  are 
emitted  in  all  directions  by  the  radium  fluoride,  they  cross  the 
magnetic  field  at  different  angles  with  its  direction.  If  we 
consider  one  which  moves  with  velocity  v  at  an  angle  a 
with  the  magnetic  field  H,  it  is  subject  to  a  force  qvH  sin  ale 
normally  to  the  plates  of  the  condenser,  while,  at  the  same  time, 
it  is  subject  to  a  force  ^E  due  to  the  electric  field  E.  These  two 
forces  will  balance  one  another  if  vH  sin  a  =  cE,  and,  if  this 
is  so,  the  electron  will  move  in  a  straight  line  and  so  be  able 
to  pass  right  through  the  narrow  gap  between  the  plates  of 
the  condenser.  (The  gap  between  the  condenser  plates  being 
so  narrow  compared  with  their  length,  it  may  be  taken  that 
the  electrons  emerging  at  a  given  angle  a  have  a  very  definite 
velocity  given  by  this  equation.)  On  emerging  they  will  be 
subject  to  the  magnetic  field  only,  and  will  therefore  be 
deflected  from  a  straight  path. 

According  to  the  above  theory  there  should  be  an  accelera- 
tion perpendicular  to  v  and  to  H  of  magnitude  ^z/H  sin  a/mc{3, 
and  the  distance  to  be  traversed  is  d/sin  a,  d  being  the  distance 
from  the  condenser  to  the  plate. 

Thus  to  a  first  approximation  the  deflection  z  will  be 
given  by 

z  =  -J(^/Hsin  ajmcff)  (d\v  sin  a)2 


In  this  expression  for  z  every  factor  is  independent  of  a  ex- 
cept /3-1  which  is  equal  (i  -  E2/H2  sin2a)£. 

Thus  the  electrons  will  meet  the  plate  in  a  curved  line 
with  a  maximum  deflection  for  the  rays  incident  normally, 
that  is,  for  a  =  |TT. 

The  measurements  in  the  third  part  of  the  table  below 
were  made  by  the  application  of  this  method,  which  has  proved 
capable  of  much  more  accuracy  than  the  original  method  of 
Kaufmann. 

54.  TABLE  OF  RESULTS. 

For  the  purpose  of  comparison  of  results  obtained  by 
different  methods  and  for  electrons  of  different  velocities,  it  is 

5* 


68 


RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 


convenient  to  put  together  the  values  of  the  ratio  q\m>  m  being, 
as  above,  the  apparent  mass  for  small  velocities,  the  equations 
of  motion  being  assumed  to  be  those  obtained  above  by  the 
application  of  the  Principle  of  Relativity.  It  will  be  seen  that 
there  is  a  remarkable  agreement  between  the  values  obtained. 

The  first  four  lines  in  the  table  give  the  ratio  q\m  for  com- 
paratively slow  rays,  as  the  cathode  rays,  and  the  rays  emitted 
by  a  glowing  body.  For  these  there  is  no  question  as  to  the 
dependence  of  inertia  upon  velocity. 

Next  is  given  the  value  which  is  predicted  by  the  best 
measurements  of  the  Zeeman  effect,  interpreted  on  the  hypo- 
thesis that  the  spectral  lines  are  due  to  the  vibrations  of  an 
electron. 

The  last  part  of  the  table  gives  the  values  obtained  from 
£-rays  of  velocity  comparable  with  that  of  light. 


vjc 

q\m  x 
10  -7 

J.  Classen,  "Verb.  d.  Deut.  Phys.  Cres.,"  10  (1908),  p.  700  . 
J.  Malassez,  "  Ann.  d.  Chim.  et  de  Phys.,"  23  (1911),  p.  231 

• 
* 

i'773 
1769 

A.  Bestelmeyer,  "Ann.  der  Phys.,"  35  (1911),  p.  909     . 

• 

1766 

E.  Alberti,  "Ann.  der  Phys.,"  39  (1912),  p.  1133  . 

* 

1766 

Weiss  and  Cotton,  "  J.  de  Phys.,"  6  (1907),  p.  429 

t 

1767 

P.  Gmelin,  "Ann.  der  Phys.,"  28  (1909),  p.  1079  . 

1771 

A.  Bucherer,  -  Ann.  der  Phys."   {£  <'$*>;  £  JJ|    .        . 

"Si 
•69 

i752'\ 
1767  / 

R.  Wolz,  "  Ann.  der  Phys.,"  30  (1909),  p.  273 

{? 

17676-1- 

17672; 

C.  Schaefer  (G.  Neumann),  "  Phys.  Zeit.,"  xiv  (1913),  p.  1117 

•4  to  -8 

17676  3 

In  addition  to  the  experiments  of  Wolz,  Bucherer,  and 
Neumann,  reference  should  be  made  to  those  of  Hupka.4 

*  Negligible. 

f  Assumed  to  be  negligible;  experiments  on  Zeeman  effect. 

1  Bucherer,  in  a  later  paper,  points  out  a  correction  which  should  be  made 
for  the  edge  effect  of  the  condenser.  This  would  probably  raise  this  result  to  the 
same  value  as  the  others.  The  following  experiments  of  Wolz  took  particular 
note  of  this  correction.  2  ±  '0025. 

3 Of  26  results  obtained,  all  lie  between  175  and  i'8  ;  all  but  four  between 
175  and  178.  Possible  error,  +  '0025.  See  Figure  (8)  below. 

*  «  Ann.  d.  Phys.,"  31  (1910),  p.  169. 


MECHANICS  AND  THE  PRINCIPLE  OF  RELATIVITY   69 


1 

1 

O       j 

/ 

£ 

(0 

9 

1 

I 

1 

/ 

6 

JO 

t4- 

0 

1 

0       JJ? 

/ 

TO 

3 

r. 

r 
i 

X 

0  ^OvP 

^     JZ 

X    ^ 

t 

/ 

ill 

<r° 

7 

i 
i 

I  5 

2  ^ 
n    ^ 

* 

/ 

0     ^g   oo 

**-     2 

U)      ^       W 

V.       ft) 

i 
i 

/ 

O      <fc       3 
^     — 

CQ      « 

t 

i 

I 

i 

f-  . 

A      S 

JC 

1 

b 

i 

6 

i 

<v 
> 

3 
o 

a 

§   £ 

0 

1 

* 

1 

r 

* 

J 

9 

in 

II 

70         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

This  author  does  not  give  an  absolute  value  of  qjm.  He 
shows,  however,  that  over  a  considerable  range  of  velocities 
the  formula  of  Lorentz  gives  a  very  constant  value  for  qjm, 
e.g.  in  one  set  of  Hupka's  experiments  in  which  the  values  of 
vie  varied  between  -346  and  "501  the  calculated  values  of  q\m 
did  not  vary  by  more  than  '03  per  cent. 

55.  THE  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  THIS  VERIFICATION. 

The  experiments  which  have  just  been  discussed  were,  in 
the  first  instance,  undertaken  by  Kaufmann  merely  with  the 
intention  of  examining  how  far  the  inertia  of  an  electron  was 
due  to  the  charge  which  it  carried.  It  had  been  suggested  by 
Sir  J.  J.  Thomson  as  early  as  1881  that  the  inertia  of  a  body 
was  increased  by  the  presence  of  an  electric  charge  on  it.  The 
result  of  Kaufmann's  first  experiments  on  the  cathode  rays 
was  to  show  that,  within  the  range  of  velocities  there  present, 
the  whole  inertia  of  the  particles  varied  exactly  in  the  same 
way  as  the  electro-magnetic  part  of  it  should  do,  as  calculated 
by  Abraham  from  the  hypothesis  that  the  electron  was  a 
spherical  distribution  of  charge. 

Three  years  later,  on  the  publication  of  the  suggestion  of 
the  contracting  electron  to  explain  the  results  of  the  Michel- 
son  and  Morley  experiment,  Kaufmann  repeated  his  ex- 
periments with  the  /3-rays  in  which  higher  velocities  were 
accessible,  with  the  object  of  distinguishing  between  the  two 
theories.  It  cannot  be  said  that  the  results  obtained  were  en- 
tirely in  favour  of  Lorentz' s  hypothesis  ;  but  more  recent  ex- 
periments, as  the  figures  reproduced  in  the  above  tables  show, 
were  distinctly  so.  We  may  now  say  with  certainty  that  the 
contraction  hypothesis  is  not  contradicted  by  experiment. 

But  to  say  that  the  results  confirm  the  hypothesis  '  that  the 
whole  of  the  inertia  is  attributable  to  purely  electro-magnetic 
origin '  is  to  forget  the  nature  of  the  assumptions  that  are  made 
in  making  the  calculations. 

The  argument,  as  given  by  Lorentz,  rests  essentially  on 
the  hypothesis  of  the  contracting  electron.  ,  It  was  remarked 
above  that  to  make  this  hypothesis  is  in  reality  only  to  shift 
the  difficulty  of  explaining  the  facts  back  from  the  FitzQerald 


MECHANICS  AND  THE  PRINCIPLE  OF  RELATIVITY    71 

hypothesis,  which  refers  to  concrete  matter,  to  the  same 
hypothesis  about  a  purely  conjectural  element  in  the  constitu- 
tion of  matter,  and  there  it  must  be  left  If  we  accept  the 
crude  picture  of  the  electron  as  a  spherical  shell  carrying  a 
surface  layer  of  charge,  we  must  not  ask  how  this  shell  is  held 
together  against  the  mutual  repulsions  of  the  parts  of  the  charge 
which  is  carried ;  in  fact,  we  hardly  dare  think  of  the  charge 
on  the  electron  as  divisible,  much  less  may  we  ask  why  the 
electron  contracts,  and  whether  there  are  '  forces '  which  cause 
it  to  do  so.  All  that  we  can  do  is  merely  to  assume  that  it  is 
exactly  so  constituted  as  to  fall  in  with  the  experimental  facts. 

There  is  then  something  over  and  above  purely  electro- 
magnetic theory  required  for  the  complete  explanation  of  the 
facts  observed.  The  simple  comparison  of  the  results  of 
Abraham  and  Lorentz,  which  give  entirely  different  values  for 
the  apparent  inertia  of  an  electron  whose  velocity  is  compar- 
able with  that  of  light,  shows  that  the  choice  of  this  additional 
element  to  supplement  the  electro-magnetic  laws  is  one  which 
may  seriously  affect  the  results  predicted  by  those  laws.  This 
is,  for  example,  clearly  shown  by  the  lower  curve  in  fig.  8, 
which  exhibits  side  by  side  the  values  of  q\m  calculated  from 
the  experimental  results  of  Neumann  (i)  by  Lorentz's  theory, 
(ii)  by  Abraham's  theory.  The  latter  theory  differs  only  from 
that  of  Lorentz  in  the  assumption  that  the  electron  is  always 
a  sphere,  whatever  velocity  it  is  supposed  to  have. 

Thus  the  agreement  of  experiment  with  the  predictions 
of  Lorentz's  theory  confirms  the  general  correctness  of  his 
hypothesis.  But  it  cannot  be  said  to  confirm  the  particular 
hypothesis  of  the  contracting  electron,  which  is  only  one  of 
many  that  are  consistent  with  the  Principle  of  Relativity.  In 
any  case,  it  cannot  be  said  that  Lorentz's  theory  is  a  purely 
electro-magnetic  one. 

The  results  recorded  above  are  therefore  to  be  considered 
as  confirming  the  general  hypothesis  of  relativity  as  a  principle 
that  goes  beyond  the  mere  invariant  form  of  the  electro- 
magnetic equations. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

MINKOWSKI'S  FOUR-DIMENSION  VECTORS. 
56.  INTRODUCTORY. 

THE  position  at  which  our  discussion  has  now  arrived  is  this. 
We  saw  in  Chapter  III.  that,  confining  our  attention  to  the 
facts  of  the  propagation  of  light  in  free  space,  the  possible 
methods  of  partitioning  time  and  space  were  not  independent 
of  one  another,  that  there  was  no  unique  sense  to  be  attached 
to  the  phrase  "  simultaneity  of  events ".  This  has  been 
followed  by  a  consideration  of  physical  phenomena  of  a  varied 
nature,  with  the  result  that  we  have  arrived  at  the  conclusion 
that  the  ambiguity  in,  and  the  interdependence  of,  the  modes 
of  measurement  of  time  and  space  has,  up  to  the  present,  not 
been  removed. 

Minkowski  says  of  the  situation  so  created  :  "From  hence- 
forth^ space  by  itself,  and  time  by  itself,  are  mere  shadows,  and 
only  a  kind  of  blend  of  the  two  exists  in  its  own  right"?- 

All  future  discussion  of  the  exact  relations  of  the  constitu- 
tion of  matter  must  be  influenced  by  the  general  evidence  for 
the  validity  of  the  hypothesis  of  relativity.  If  the  principle  is 
not  universal  it  will  sooner  or  later  prove  its  own  destruction 
by  predicting  results  which  are  at  variance  with  experiments. 
We  must  remember,  however,  that  the  principle  is  on  a  dif- 
ferent plane  from  such  "  physical "  laws  as  those  embodied  in 
Maxwell's  equations  or  the  law  of  gravitation.  It  is  a  general 

]  "  Raum  und  Zeit,"  1908.     Reprinted  in  "  Das  Relativitats  prinzip,"  Leipzig^ 

72 


MINKOWSKPS  FOUR-DIMENSION  VECTORS  73 

mode  of  thought.  We  are  not  concerned  with  any  particular 
quantitative  law,  but  with  the  question  as  to  whether  all  the 
quantitative  laws  of  physics  conform  to  a  certain  common 
criterion. 

There  is  one  such  common  criterion  which  is  commonly 
accepted.  We  may  call  it  the  " vectorial"  criterion,  or  the 
criterion  that  a  mere  change  of  orientation  of  a  physical 
system  in  space  will  not  alter  its  intrinsic  properties.  Space 
is  said  to  be  isotropic  as  far  as  it  is  merely  a  mode  of  ordering 
physical  properties.  The  result  is  that,  although  we  often 
employ  a  particular  set  of  co-ordinate  axes  as  a  frame  of  re- 
ference, we  recognize  that  the  form  of  the  equations  which 
embody  our  physical  laws  must  be  one  which  is  unaltered  if 
we  turn  our  axes  into  any  other  angular  position.  What  is 
known  as  "  vector  analysis  "  is  a  notation  and  calculus  which 
recognises  this  principle  from  the  beginning,  and  which  is 
adapted  specially  and  only  to  the  expression  of  such  laws  as 
conform  to  it. 

The  criterion  of  relativity  is  very  analogous  to  this,  and 
was,  in  fact,  shown  by  Minkowski  to  be  expressible  as  a 
generalization  of  it.  An  attempt  will  now  be  made  to  present 
the  main  idea  introduced  by  Minkowski. 

57.  THE  LORENTZ  TRANSFORMATION  AS  A  ROTATION  OF 

AXES. 

The  change  in  the  measures  of  space  and  time,  which  we 
have  called  a  Lorentz  transformation,  may  be  written  thus — 
x  =  x  cos  0  —  u  sin  6,    y  =  y, 
u  =  x  sin  6  +  u  cos  0,    z  =  #, 
where,  /standing  as  usual  for  *J(-  i), 

u  =  ict,  u  =  ict',  cos  e  =         *          sin  6  =   ~ 

the  last  two  quantities  satisfying  the  equation 

cos20  +  sin20  =  I. 
The  analogous  equations  in  three  variables, 

X  =  x  cos  0  -  2  sin  0,    y  —  y, 

z  =  x  sin  6  +  z  cos  6. 


74        RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

are  the  equations  which  correspond  to  a  simple  rotation  of  the 
axes  of  co-ordinates  through  an  angle  6  about  the  axis  of  y. 

We  may  then  think  of  the  Lorentz  change  of  variables  as 
a  rotation  of  the  imaginary  set  of  axes  through  the  imaginary 
angle  9  in  the  four-dimension  space  in  which  the  co-ordinates 
are  (ar,  y,  z,  icf).  This  is,  of  course,  only  a  way  of  visual- 
izing what  are  in  effect  algebraic  processes  involving  only  real 
quantities. 

58.  EXTENSION  OF  THE  IDEA  OF  A  "VECTOR". 

Again,  in  three  dimensions  we  speak  of  *  vector  quantities/ 
as  directed  quantities  which  combine  according  to  the  parallelo- 
gram law. 

If  a  certain  vector  is  represented  by  components  (X,  Y,  Z) 
along  the  axes  of  (x,  y,  z\  and  by  the  components  (X',  Y',  Z') 
when  the  axes  of  (x ,  yt  z)  are  used,  the  relations  connecting 
(X',  Y',  Z')  with  (X,  Y,  Z)  are  exactly  the  same  as  those  con- 
necting (ar,  y\  z')  with  (x>  y,  z).  A  vector  quantity  can  be 
exactly  represented  by  a  line. 

So  Minkowski  speaks  of  '4-vectorsJ  as  quantities  with 
four  components  which  when  the  frame  of  reference  is  changed 
are  subject  to  exactly  the  same  equations  as  are  the  space- 
time  co-ordinates  (ar,  y,  z,  u).  As  a  particular  case,  for  the 
Lorentz  transformation  the  4-vector  (X,  Y,  Z,  U)  is  changed 
to  (X',  Y',  Z',  U'),  according  to  the  equations 

X'  =  £(X  -  M/U),  Y'  =  Y,  Z'  =  Z,  U'  =  /3(U  +  wX/*8), 
where  the  velocity  v  is  arbitrary,  and  the  direction  of  the  axis 
of  x  is  also  an  arbitrary  direction  in  space. 

These  equations  are  equivalent  to 

X'  =  £(X  +  z/T),  Y'  =  Y,  Z'  =  Z,  T  =  /3(T  +  vX/*8), 
where  U  =  zVT,  and  U'  =  icl'. 

59.  EXAMPLES  OF  4- VECTORS. 

Let  two  point-instants  be  in  a  certain  frame  of  reference  (xu  ya  zlt  /x) 
(*ai  y*>  *a,  /a)-  since  (*n  y-a  *»  *#i)»  (xv  ?*>  zv  ict'b  are  4-vectors,  so  is 
their  difference 

*  -  *   *<*  -     - 


MINKOWSKPS  FOUR-DIMENSION  VECTORS  75 

If  we  write  for  the  differences  (8x,  Sy,  8g,  zVS/),  remembering  the 
fundamental  property  that 


is  an  invariant  (p.  40),  it  follows  that 

(bx,  S/,  dg,  icdtytM 
is  a  4-vector  ;  that  is,  for  a  moving  point 

U  =  <(ux,  uy,  ux,  ic)  is  a  4-vector 
where  <  =  (i  -  (ux*  +  u*  +  u»*)l*}-*. 

More  generally, 
if  I  =  (X,  Y,  Z,  U)  is  any  4-vector 

then  j  =  *  §.  (X,  Y,  Z,  U)  is  a  4-vector. 

where  X,  Y,  Z,  U  are  supposed  to  be  any  functions  of  the  space-time  co- 
ordinates (*,  y,  z,  /)  of  a  certain  moving  point. 

The  following  may  be  stated  to  be  4-vectors  without  proof  :  — 

e  =  {e  +  [uh]/f,  i(ue)/^} 

D  =  (h  -  [ue]/<r,  i(uh)/*}, 

where  the  symbols  have  the  same  meanings  as  in  the  fundamental  equa- 
tions, and  the  first  three  components  of  the  4-vector  are  the  components  of 
the  ordinary  vectors  specified. 

60.  SPACE  AND  TIME  AS  Two  ASPECTS  OF  A  UNITY. 

We  now  see  what  Minkowski  had  in  mind  when  he  spoke 
of  "  only  a  blend  of  space  and  time  existing  in  its  own  right  ". 
The  4-vector  is  thought  of  as  a  single  entity,  just  as  ordinarily 
we  think  of  a  force  as  a  single  entity.  The  components  of  a 
force  do  not  exist  by  themselves.  They  are  only  convenient 
means  of  specifying  the  force  which  is  one  and  definite.  Just 
in  the  same  way  space  and  time  co-ordinates  are  to  Minkowski 
only  particular  and  complementary  aspects  of  a  single  fact  or 
occurrence. 

Analytically  Minkowski  transports  himself  to  a  space  of 
four  dimensions  in  which  the  distinction  between  space  and  time 
vanishes.  In  this  four-dimensional  region,  the  whole  of  space 
and  time  is  portrayed  in  one  construct.  The  motion  of  a  moving 
point  through  all  time  is  represented  by  a  single  curve,  the 
points  on  the  curve  being  ordered  to  correspond  with  the  suc- 
cession of  events  in  time,  but  the  interpretation  of  the  curve 
as  representing  an  ordinary  motion  is  not  unique;  it  depends 
upon  the  choice  of  the  direction  in  the  four-dimensional  region 
which  is  chosen  to  be  the  time  axis. 


76         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

Thus  three-dimensional  kinematics  becomes  four-dimen- 
sional geometry.  This  relation  extends  further,  it  reaches  into 
the  domain  of  mechanical  quantities.  Three-dimensional  dyna- 
mics can  be  interpreted  as  a  four-dimensional  statics,  an 
exact  generalization  of  three-dimensional  statics.  An  example 
of  this  will  be  given  shortly. 

61.  A  SECOND  KIND  OF  FOUR-DIMENSIONAL  VECTOR. 

Before  passing  on  to  this,  however,  it  will  be  well  in  passing 
to  indicate  the  way  in  which  Minkowski,  thinking  in  terms 
of  this  four-dimension  space,  pictures  the  significance  of  the 
relativity  of  the  electro-magnetic  vectors  e  and  h. 

In  ordinary  three-dimension  space  an  element  of  a  straight 
line — i.e.  a  one-dimensional  region — and  an  element  of  area 
— i.e.  a  two-dimensional  region — may  be  equally  well  repre- 
sented as  vectors.  But  in  four  dimensions,  of  the  elements 
of  regions  of  one,  two,  and  three  dimensions,  only  the 
first  and  third  are  capable  of  representation  as  what  we  have 
called  4-vectors.  A  two-dimensional  element  will  have  to 
be  represented  by  six  components,  corresponding  to  the 
number  of  ways  of  choosing  two  out  of  the  four  co-ordinates 
of  a  point. 

Now  Minkowski  was  able  to  show  that  the  transformations 
(B,  p.  48),  affecting  (exy  ey,  ez~)  (ikx,  ihy,  ihz}  are  exactly  of 
the  same  form  as  those  which  affect  the  six  components  of  a 
two-dimensional  region  in  four-dimension  space  when  the 
fundamental  geometrical  transformation  of  (ar,  j,  z,  /)  is  carried 
out  Hence  he  introduces  a  new  conception ;  he  defines  a 
1  6- vector'  to  be  a  quantity  with  six  components  which  trans- 
forms in  exactly  this  way.  Then  the  validity  of  the  trans- 
formation (B)  is  contained  in  the  phrase 

3f  =*  (e,  zh)  is  a  6 -vector. 

One  property  which  follows  from  this,  and  which  may  be 
deduced  immediately  from  (B),  is  that 

jf 2  =  e2  -  h2  is  invariant. 

We  might  here  extend  the  remark  of  Minkowski  quoted 
above  (p.  72),  and  say  that  "from  this  point  the  electric  intensity 
and  the  magnetic  intensity  apart  from  each  other  have  no  signi- 


MINKOWSKPS  FOUR-DIMENSION  VECTORS  77 

ficance,  but  that  only  a  single  quantity  compounded  of  the  two 
exists  in  its  own  ru 


62.  THE  PRINCIPLE  OF  LEAST  ACTION  A  GENERALIZATION 

OF   THAT   OF   LEAST   POTENTIAL   ENERGY. 

It  is  now  possible  to  give  a  striking  example  of  the  way 
in  which  these  conceptions  give  to  dynamical  equations  a 
symmetrical  form  which  is  an  exact  generalization  of  the 
ordinary  vectorial  form  of  statical  equations. 

In  electrostatics  the  '  total  energy  '  of  a  field  may  be  written 


where  dV  is  an  element  of  volume1  ;  and  there  is  a  well-known 
theorem  that  the  electro-static  field  is  such  as  to  render  this 
total  energy  a  minimum  subject  only  to  the  restrictions  imposed 
on  it  by  a  given  distribution  of  charge.  The  generalization  of 
this  is  :  — 

If  d\&  represent  an  element  of  the  four-dimensional  space,  and 
JjfVU)  be  called  the  'total  action]  then  the  electro-dynamic  field 
is  such  as  to  make  this  total  action  a  minimum,  subject  only  to 
the  restrictions  implied  by  a  given  distribution  of  moving  charges. 

This  is  only  the  expression  in  the  language  of  four  vectors 
of  the  known  theorem  that  the  equations  of  the  electro-magnetic 
field  are  such  as  to  make  the  time  integral  of  the  difference  of 
the  magnetic  and  electric  energies  a  minimum.  In  ordinary 
notation  this  integral  is 


In  comparing  these  theorems  we  may  note  that  whereas  in 
the  former  the  '  total  energy  '  is  a  quantity  which  is  indepen- 
dent of  the  frame  of  reference,  so  in  the  second  the  'total 
action  '  is  a  quantity  that  does  not  change  when  we  alter  the 
space-time  system  of  measurement.3  For  it  has  been  pointed 
out  above  that  3f2  is  invariant,  and  the  element  of  integration 
d\D  is  unaltered  by  a  turning  round  of  the  axes. 

1  Remembering  that  we  are  using  Lorentz's  units. 

2  See  Larmor,  ««  ^Ether  and  Matter,"  pp.  82  if. 

3  In  changing  from  the  variables  (x,  y,  z,  t)  to  (#',  y',  z',  t')  we  substitute  for 

<W  the  quantity    ^*]  •?;  *;  *)  dW,  and  it  is  easily  seen  that  ^|*'  •?'  *'  *|    is 
unity. 


78         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

63.  THE  NEW  MECHANICS— c  FORCE'  AND  'WORK'  AS 
Two  ASPECTS  OF  A  SINGLE  CONCEPT. 

In  the  classical  mechanics  there  have  always  been  two 
strains  of  thought.  The  two  aspects  of  *  force '  as  '  the  time 
rate  of  change  of  momentum,'  and  as  '  the  space  rate  of  change 
of  energy,'  have  with  different  writers  been  given  different 
degrees  of  prominence.  Galileo  developed  the  former,  Huy- 
ghens  the  latter.  In  the  light  of  four-dimensional  vectors 
the  two  ideas  become  unified,  and  differ  only  as  partial  aspects 
of  a  greater  concept,  just  as  space  and  time  are  unified  and 
become  partial  aspects  of  the  whole  extension  of  the  universe. 
The  equations  of  motion  for  a  body  moving  as  a  whole 
with  velocity  u  without  rotation  are 

4-.k 

di  -   k> 

g  being  the  momentum,  and  k  the  moving  force. 

The  energy  equation  is  -  =  (ku) 

at 

w  being  the  energy,  and  u  the  velocity. 

In  order  to  bring  these  equations  into  line  with  the  Prin- 
ciple of  Relativity,  we  have  only  to  assume 

(i)  that  if  g  is  the  momentum  and  w  the  energy  then  (g,  iwjc) 
is  a  ^-vector,  Q  ; 

(ii)   that  if  k  is  the  force  acting  on  the  particle  and  u  its 
velocity  then 

(k,  *  (ku)/£)  is  a  ^-vector,  ft ; 

(iii)  that   the   ordinary    equations  of  Newton  are   only  an 
approximation  to  the  more  exact  equations 


We  have  seen  that  (&r,  By,  82,  ic&f)  being  a  4-vector,  Stlic 
is  an  invariant. 

Hence  if  f  is  any  4-vector,  and  Sf  is  a  small  change  in  it, 

K  -5-  or,  in  the  limit,  K  — 
dt  dt 

is  another  4-vector. 

Now,  if  (ft)  =  (k,  z(ku)/£)  be  a  4-vector, the  equation 

=  K~dt 


MINKOWSKPS  FOUR-DIMENSION  VECTORS  79 

is  an  equation  of  invariant  form,  that  is,  it  expresses  relations 
which  are  in  accord  with  the  Principle  of  Relativity. 
The  first  three  components  of  this  equation  give 

*-«*? 

dt 

which  if  (vie)2  be  neglected  reduces  to  the  Newtonian  form, 


while  the  fourth  component  is,  to  the  same  order, 

/i    \       dw 

(ku)  '  -di 

which  is  the  usual  equation  of  energy. 

The  distinction  between  the  schools  of  Galileo  and  Huy- 
ghens,  between  'force*  and  'work/  is  here  lost,  and  we  see 
them  each  as  partial  aspects  of  a  greater  whole. 

64.  RELATION  BETWEEN  MOMENTUM  AND  ENERGY. 

The  stipulation  that  Q  shall  be  a  4-vector  requires  us  to 
modify  the  usual  relations  which  connect  the  momentum  and 
energy  of  a  moving  particle  with  its  velocity.  Let  us  make 
the  assumption  that  for  a  particle  at  rest  the  momentum  is  zero. 
Then  for  that  case 

QO  =  (o,  o,  o,  iw0lc] 

where  w0  is  the  energy  of  the  stationary  particle. 

Now,  for  any  particle  whatever  we  may  choose  a  frame 
of  reference  of  which  the  origin  has  momentarily  the  same 
velocity  as  the  particle.  The  extended  velocity  vector 
U  =  /e(u,  ic)  then  becomes 

Uo  =  (o,  o,  o,  ic\ 
since  in  this  frame  of  reference  the  particle  is  at  rest. 

The  two  vectors,  Q0,  U0  are  thus  in  the  same  direction,  and 
we  may  write 

Qo=~Uo. 

Now  the  equality  of  two  vectors  is  an  invariant  relation  ; 
so  that,  whatever  the  frame  of  reference,  we  must  have  for  the 
same  particle 


8o         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 
The  last  equation  resolves  into 

*^   =  ^— 

and  w  =  KW.  W> 


(I  -  u 

g  and  z^  being  connected  by  the  relation 

g  =  wu/c*. 

Of  these  results  we  may  note  the  following  consequences 
if  we  neglect  higher  powers  of  u/c  than  the  second  : — 

(i)  w  =  w0(l  +  iu2/<^)  =  w0  +  ^mu2, 

(ii)  g  =  w0ult?  =  muy  where  m  =  wjc?. 

The  quantity  m  here  enters  in  exactly  the  same  way  as 
the  Newtonian  mass  ;  thus  we  are  led  to  contemplate  a  relation 
between  the  mass  of  a  particle  and  its  energy.  That  it  is  a 
possible  relation  appears  from  the  following  figures.  If  the 
particle  were  to  give  out  energy,  as  in  the  case  of  radioactive 
bodies,  the  apparent  mass  should,  according  to  this  relation, 
diminish.  But  if  we  take  the  actual  rate  of  loss  of  energy  by 
a  gram-atom  (225  grms.)  of  radium  in  its  disintegration, 
which  is  about  io12  ergs  per  hour,  and  divide  by  <?,  the 
rate  of  diminution  of  the  mass  would  be  only  about  io~5  gr. 
per  year,  which  is  quite  inappreciable  by  ordinary  methods. 

In  the  case  of  large  velocities  the  concept  of  '  mass '  be- 
comes meaningless,  but  we  still  have  the  relation 

g  =  wu/<? 

which  indicates  that  the  convection  of  energy  by  a  moving 
body  implies  an  amount  of  momentum  equal  to  the  product 
of  energy  and  velocity  divided  by  &. 

Thus  if  a  body  moving  uniformly  is  radiating  energy,  it  is 
also  losing  momentum.  The  equation 


then  indicates  that  there  is  a  force  acting  on  the  body  even 
though  its  velocity  remains  constant. 

It  has  sometimes  been  suggested  as  a  parodox,  that  whereas 
ordinary  electro-magnetic  theory  clearly  indicates  a  resistance 


MINKO  WSKPS  FO  UK-DIMENSION  VECTORS  8 1 

to  the  motion  of  a  radiating  body  through  the  aether,1  yet  the 
Principle  of  Relativity  must  allow  that  a  body  radiating  equally 
in  all  directions  must  be  capable  of  remaining  in  uniform 
motion  through  the  aether  if  subject  to  no  external  force. 

The  above  analysis  resolves  the  paradox ;  it  admits  the 
resistance,  but  finds  it  to  be  equal  to  the  rate  at  which  mo- 
mentum is  lost  owing  to  the  radiation  of  energy,  even  though 
the  velocity  be  unchanged. 

This  proposition  of  the  momentum  or  inertia  of  energy  is 
one  which,  in  the  development  of  mechanics  subject  to  the 
Principle  of  Relativity,  is  universal.  A  familar  instance  is  to 
be  found  in  the  mechanics  of  the  free  aether  as  ordinarily 
stated.  Poynting,  in  an  analysis  of  electro-magnetic  energy, 
suggested  that,  at  any  point  of  free  space,  there  is  a  >flux  of 
energy  represented  by  the  vector  £[EH]  ;  while  later,  Abraham 
showed  that  we  may  maintain  the  proposition  of  the  conserva- 
tion of  momentum  as  between  aether  and  electric  charge  if  we 
allow  of  .a  distribution  of  momentum  in  the  aether  of  intensity 
[EH]/£  Here  again  the  flux  of  energy  is  equal  to  the  mo- 
mentum multiplied  by  ^2,  in  exact  agreement  with  the  cor- 
responding result  for  a  material  particle. 

65.  THE  TROUTON-NOBLE  EXPERIMENT.2 
There  is  an  apparent  contradiction,  somewhat  similar  to 
that  referred  to  in  §  64,  in  the  case  of  a  radiating  body  in  uniform 
motion,  which  arises  in  respect  of  the  moment  of  the  forces 
acting  on  a  system  in  uniform  motion.  It  can  be  shown 
that,  in  order  to  reconcile  the  mechanical  principles  of 
conservation  of  momentum  and  conservation  of  energy  in 
the  aether  with  the  known  laws  of  propagation  of  electro- 
magnetic disturbances,  it  is  necessary  to  assign  to  the  aether 
a  velocity  which  is  not  in  general  in  the  direction  of  the 
momentum.  In  the  same  way  it  is  possible  so  to  modify 
mechanical  equations  of  any  deformable  continuous  system, 
using  the  same  methods  that  have  been  indicated  above  for 
modifying  the  dynamics  of  a  single  particle,  that  they  may  be 
in  accord  with  the  Principle  of  Relativity. 

1  See  Larmor,  "  International  Congress  of  Mathematicians,"  Cambridge, 
1912,  p.  216.  2  See  p.  58. 

6 


RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 


In  doing  this  two  important  results  emerge.  The  first 
is  that  the  relation  referred  to  above  between  the  flux  of 
energy1  and  the  momentum  must  be  made  universal.  The 
second  is  that,  in  general,  the  momentum  per  unit  volume  at 
any  point  of  the  medium  need  not  be  in  the  direction  of  the 
velocity  of  the  medium  at  that  point. 

In  a  case  where  this  difference  of  direction  arises  it  is  easy 
to  see  that,  for  an  element  of  volume  moving  with  uniform 
velocity  and  with  constant  linear  momentum,  the  moment  of 
momentum  about  a  fixed  point  is  not  constant  as  it  is  when 
the  directions  are  the  same.  For  in  the  figure  let  P,  P'  be 
the  positions  of  the  element  at  two  consecutive  instants,  so 

that  PP'  =  vSt,  and  let  the  linear 
momentum  be  in  the  direction  NP 
and  of  constant  magnitude  g. 

Then  it  is  clear  from  the  figure 
that  in  the  time  8t  the  moment  of 
the  momentum  about  O  diminishes 
by  g  x  NN',  that  is,  by  gv  sin  6&t, 
a  quantity  which  only  vanishes  if  g 
and  v  are  in  the  same  straight  line. 
Thus  in  the  mechanics  of  the 
Principle  of  Relativity  we  shall  not  expect  that  the  moment  of 
momentum  of  a  body  moving  uniformly  relative  to  a  given 
frame  of  reference  will  always  remain  constant.  Exactly  such 
a  case  arises  in  the  conditions  of  the  experiment  of  Trouton 
and  Noble  (see  p.  58).  Here  a  charged  plane  condenser  is  sup- 
posed to  be  placed  obliquely  to  its  direction  of  motion  relative 
to  a  given  frame  of  reference.  The  classical  theory  shows 
clearly  that  there  must  be  a  couple  acting  on  it  in  a  sense 
which  would,  according  to  ordinary  dynamics,  tend  to  turn  it 
so  as  to  be  normal  to  the  direction  of  motion.  But  if  the 
dynamics  of  the  Principle  of  Relativity  are  applied  to  this 
case  we  find  that  the  couple  is  exactly  equal  to  the  rate  of 
change  of  the  moment  of  momentum  which  arises  as  above 
from  the  fact  that  the  linear  momentum,  though  constant,  is 
in  a  different  direction  from  the  velocity.  Thus  the  mechanical 

1  Flux  of  Energy  =  Momentum  x  c3. 


MINKOWSKPS  FOUR-DIMENSION  VECTORS  83 

conditions  are  completely  fulfilled  without  any  rotation  of  the 
condenser  being  set  up.1 

66.   EXTENSION  OF  ANALOGY  BETWEEN  DYNAMICS 
AND  STATICS. 

In  §  62  we  have  shown  that  the  relation  of  the  laws  of  the 
electro-dynamic  field  to  the  principle  of  least  action  can  be 
looked  upon  as  the  extension  to  Minkowski's  four-dimensional 
world  of  the  relation  of  the  laws  of  the  electro-static  field  to 
the  principle  of  least  potential  energy.  In  that  statement, 
however,  no  account  was  taken  of  the  mechanical  constraints 
imposed  upon  the  charge  or  current ;  the  distribution  of  these 
was  assumed  to  be  given,  and  the  variation  of  energy  or 
current  was  subject  to  the  given  distribution. 

In  the  electro-static  case,  if  the  charges  or  conductors 
carrying  them  are  supposed  to  be  moved,  we  know  that  the 
increment  in  the  electro-static  energy  is  equal  to  the  virtual 
work  of  the  non-electrical  forces  which  maintain  the  equili- 
brium of  the  conductors  against  the  electrical  attractions  and 
repulsions.  Or  again,  if  the  non-electrical  forces  are  con- 
servative so  that  we  may  speak  of  a  corresponding  potential 
energy,  the  variation  of  the  total  potential  energy  in  a  small 
displacement  from  the  equilibrium  position  is  zero.  We  note, 
of  course,  that  the  total  energy  is  a  scalar  quantity,  and  is 
independent  of  the  choice  of  any  particular  system  of  reference. 

In  the  dynamical  case  we  have  the  corresponding  theorem 
that  if  A!  represents  the  electro-dynamic  action  as  defined 
in  §  62,  and  if  there  be  a  non-electrical  action  A2,  arising  from 
non-electrical  inertia  and  forces,  then  if  A  =  Ax  +  A2  is  called 
the  'total  action,'  then,  for  any  slight  variation  of  the  currents 
and  motion  of  the  carriers  of  charge  and  current  from  the  actual 
motion  which  takes  place,  the  variation  in  A  is  zero. 

This  very  general  proposition  must,  as  in  the  simpler  case, 
be  independent  of  the  choice  of  a  frame  of  reference ;  that  is, 
if  we  maintain  the  relativity  of  all  the  phenomena,  it  must 
have  an  invariant  form  for  any  change  of  axes  in  Minkowski's 
four-dimensional  space.  Now  we  know,  as  in  §  62,  that  Alt 

1  For  a  fuller  discussion  see  the  author's  larger  work  (Camb.  Univ.  Press, 
1914,  p.  170). 


84 


RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 


the  electro-dynamic  part  of  the  action,  is  an  invariant  Hence 
the  Principle  of  Relativity  requires  that  if  there  is  a  non-electri- 
cal action  A2,  it  too  must  be  an  invariant. 

70.  One  simple  development  may  be  set  down  as  an  indication  of  the 
application  of  the  above  result. 

If  k  =  (kx,  ky,  kz)  is  a  typical  force  acting  at  a  point  (x,  y,  z]  at  time 
/,  and  we  consider  a  slightly  varied  motion  of  the  system  in  which  the  co- 
ordinates of  the  same  point  are  (x  +  &r,  y  +  ty,  z  +  dz)  at  time  (t  +  S/), 
then  the  variation  in  the  action  arising  from  k  is  known  to  be 


where  u  is  the  velocity  of  the  point  in  question  (see  e.g.  Routh,  "  Rigid 
Dynamics,"  Vol.  II,  p.  280). 

In  Minkowski's  notation  this  can  be  written  ftSr.  where  ft  =  (k,  *'(ku)/c) 
and  SC  =  (&r,  5y,  8z,  icdf).  The  invariance  of  this  quantity,  St  being  an 
arbitrary  4-vector,  requires  that  ft  shall  also  be  a  4-vector. 

APPENDIX  I.  —  THE  FUNDAMENTAL  EQUATIONS  IN 
SYMMETRICAL  FORM. 

It  may  be  worth  while  to  set  down  the  equations  of  the  field  as  Min- 
kowski  arranges  them.  For  fuller  details  see  the  author's  larger  work, 
Chapter  IX. 

Writing 


(F,,,  Fzx,  Fxy,  Fxu,  FyU) 


=  (  -  H,,  - 
-  Fsyt  etc.  ; 


-  H,, 


and  F 

also  (S^,  Sj,,  S2,  SM)  =  p  (ux,  uy)  uz,  ic}\c, 

and  u  =  icf, 

the  equations  of  the  field  become 


c)Fzx 
~W 


+ 


3F, 


du 


9* 


Or 


'du 


~3T"^r 


=  o 


=  o 


MINKOWSKPS  FOUR-DIMENSION  VECTORS  85 

The  symmetrical  form  of  the  equations  is  now  obvious.  They  may 
be  easily  shown  to  have  an  invariant  form,  and  may  be  looked  upon  as 
the  generalization  of  the  vectorial  equations  of  the  electro-static  field 

dive  =  p 
curl  e  =  o. 

(Sx,  Sy,  S*,  SM)  is  easily  seen  to  be  a  4-vector  by  means  of  the  equations 
(a)  and  (C),  p.  48. 


PART  II. 

THE   GENERAL   PRINCIPLE   OF 
RELATIVITY 

CHAPTER   VII. 

THE  GENERAL  THEORY. 

67.  THE  NEED  FOR  MORE  RADICAL  RE-CONSTRUCTION. 

WE  are  now  in  a  position  to  appreciate  the  way  in  which 
a  number  of  different  difficulties  united  in  calling  for  the 
comprehensive  reconstruction  effected  by  Einstein  under  the 
name  of  the  General  Principle  of  Relativity.  The  Special 
Principle  was  unsatisfying  in  two  ways. 

On  the  one  hand,  while  demanding  a  drastic  revision  of 
our  ordinary  ways  of  thinking  about  space  and  time,  it  was 
by  no  means  thorough-going  enough  for  the  philosopher. 
The  old  problem  of  absolute  acceleration  was  left  exactly 
at  the  same  point  at  which  Newton  had  left  it 

On  the  other  hand,  the  new  principle  had  not  been  able 
to  go  any  further  than  the  electron  theory  of  matter,  of 
which  it  was  a  natural  complement,  in  interpreting  the 
nature  of  gravitation.1  The  electro-magnetic  theory  seemed 
fairly  well  able  to  account  for  those  properties  in  which 
various  kinds  of  matter  differ  from  one  another,  as,  for 
example,  thermal  and  electrical  conductivity,  optical  dis- 
persion, magnetizability,  as  well  as  being  a  clear  basis  of 
chemical  relations.  But  of  the  two  universal  and  common 
properties  of  matter,  inertia  and  gravitation,  the  latter  remained 
obstinately  aloof.  At  the  same  time,  however,  the  growing 
conviction  that  the  Newtonian  conception  of  mass  as  an 

1  For  attempts  to  solve  the  problem  of  gravitation  on  the  ground  of  the 
Special  Principle  of  Relativity,  see  Poincare,  "  Rend,  del  Circ.  Mat.  di  Pal.,"  21 
1906),  p.  166;  also  de  Sitter,  "Monthly  Notices  of  Roy  Astr.  Soc.,"  March, 
1911,  p.  388 ;  also  various  papers  by  Nordstrom,  and  others,  in  "  Phys.  Zeitsch.". 

86 


THE  GENERAL  THEORY  OF  RELATIVITY  87 

invariable  measure  of  the  inertia  of  a  body  was  at  best  an 
approximation,  began  to  raise  the  question  as  to  whether  the 
gravitational  attraction  between  two  bodies  would  not  also  in 
some  way  depend  upon  the  frame  of  reference  adopted.  For 
the  new  theory,  supported  by  the  experiments  on  the  mass  of 
the  electron  (Chapter  V.),  showed  that  the  mass  of  a  body  for 
the  purposes  of  inertial  phenomena  was  certainly  a  function  of 
the  velocity,  and  probably  of  the  internal  energy  of  the  body. 
The  question  at  once  arose :  Is  the  gravitational  mass  of  a 
body,  the  quantity  which  measures  the  power  of  one  body  to 
attract  another,  also  a  variable  quantity  ?  If  so,  is  it  always 
proportional  to  the  inertia-coefficient  ? 

These  two  questions  bear  one  upon  the  other  at  various 
points.  For  instance,  if  Newtonian  dynamics  is  only  approxi- 
mately correct,  then  the  partial  relativity  of  dynamical  relations 
is  only  approximate  too.  Further,  if  energy  of  all  kinds  is 
inseparable  from  momentum,  if  light  has  inertia,  may  it  too  be 
subject  to  gravitation  ?  This  would  imply  a  possible  deviation 
from  the  electro-magnetic  equations  "of  Maxwell  out  of  which 
the  early  Principle  of  Relativity  arose.  That  being  so,  the 
velocity  of  light  might  not  in  strictness  conform  to  the  hypo- 
thesis of  a  fixed  and  uniform  velocity. 

This,  of  course,  would  be  expected  by  one  who  adopted 
the  point  of  view  that  space  and  time  are  merely  arbitrary 
modes  of  ordering  phenomena,  and  that  from  an  a  priori 
point  of  view  we  can  know  as  little  about  absolute  rotation 
or  acceleration  as  about  absolute  velocity. 

But  once  concede  that  the  velocity  of  light  is  not  an  ulti- 
mate, universal,  and  invariable  quantity,  and  the  whole  basis 
of  the  Special  Principle  of  Relativity  needs  revision.  For  the 
Lorentz-Einstein  transformations  were  just  selected  as  that 
group  which  preserved  this  one  metric  property  of  the  universe 
intact.  Minkowski's  four  dimensional  vectors  also  depend  for 
their  validity  on  this  special  hypothesis. 

68.  EOTVOS'  EXPERIMENTS. 

The  first  point  to  be  considered  was  that  of  the  relation 
between  the  two  universal  properties  of  matter,  inertia,  and 
gravitational  attraction.  In  the  first  instance,  the  question 


88    RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

asked  was  merely  this  :  Is  the  inertia  mass  strictly  the  same  as, 
or  proportional  to,  the  gravitation  mass  ?  Or  more  precisely, 
within  what  limit  of  accuracy  can  we  definitely  affirm  on 
experimental  grounds,  that  they  are  so  ? 

Here  the  experiments  of  Eotvos  have  been  quoted,1  which 
purport  to  show  that  the  ratio  of  the  gravitational  attraction  of 
the  earth  upon  different  bodies  to  their  inertia  masses  certainly 
does  not  vary  by  as  much  as  the  fraction  5  x  io"8;  this  in  a 
comparison  between  specimens  of  such  different  bodies  as 
brass,  glass,  antimonite,  and  cork  ;  bringing  a  mass  of  air  into 
the  comparison  also,  io~5  is  the  limit  of  accuracy  within  which 
it  is  certain  that  there  is  no  variation. 

The  principle  of  the  experiments  is  as  follows  : — 
Two  masses  of  different  substances  are  fastened  to  the 
ends  of  the  beam  of  a  delicate  torsion  balance.     The  beam  is 
adjusted  to  hang  in  an  east  to  west  direction.     It  hangs  in 
equilibrium    under   the    attraction   of  the    two    gravitational 
attractions,  and  the  centrifugal  forces  arising  from  the  earth's 
rotation.    The  latter  are  proportional  to  the  dynamical  masses 
of    the   bodies,   the    former   to    what   we   have   called   their 
gravitation  masses.     If  the  dynamical  masses  and  gravitational 
masses  are  equal,  the  resultant  forces  (or  apparent  weights  of 
the  masses)  will  be  parallel,  and  so  their  resultant  will  be  a 
single  force,  which,  of  course,  must  just  be  balanced  by  the 
tension  in  the  suspending  thread.     If,  however,  the  masses  are 
not  exactly  proportional,  the  apparent   weights  will  not  be 
parallel,   and   so  can   only   be  combined  into  a  single  force 
together  with  a   couple  about  its    line    of  action,  balanced 
respectively  by  the  tension  and  the  torsion   in  the  thread. 
The  magnitude  of  this  torsional  couple  will  be  approximately 
wlfa  where  w  is  the  weight  of  either  mass,  /  its  distance 
from  the  point  of  attachment  of  the  thread,  and  $  the  angle 
between  the  apparent  weights — an  angle  which  will  depend 
upon  the  inequality  of  the  mass  ratios. 

Eotvos  thus  describes  his  experiment : — 

"  I  attached  separate  bodies  of  about  30  grms.  weight  to 

1M  Mathematische  und  Naturwissenschaft  liche  Berichte  aus  Ungarn,"  Bd.  8 
(1891),  p.  64. 


THE  GENERAL  THEORY  OF  RELATIVITY     89 

the  ends  of  a  balance  beam  about  25  to  30  cms.  long,  suspended 
by  a  thin  platinum  wire  in  my  torsion  balance.  After  the  beam 
had  been  placed  in  a  position  perpendicular  to  the  meridian,  I 
determined  its  position  exactly  by  means  of  two  mirrors,  one 
fixed  to  it,  and  one  fastened  to  the  case  of  the  instrument 
I  then  turned  the  instrument,  together  with  the  case,  through 
1 80°  so  that  the  body  which  was  originally  at  the  east  end 
of  the  beam  now  arrived  at  the  west  end.  I  then  determined 
the  position  of  the  beam  again  relative  to  the  instrument." 

If  a  couple  such  as  has  been  mentioned  above  existed,  it 
would  on  turning  the  instrument  round  act  in  the  reverse 
direction.  Here  Eotvos  continues — "If  the  resultant  weights 
of  the  bodies  attached  on  either  side  pointed  in  different 
directions,  a  torsion  in  the  suspending  wire  should  ensue. 
But  this  did  not  occur  in  the  case  in  which  a  brass  sphere  was 
constantly  attached  to  the  one  side,  and  glass,  cork  or  crystal 
antimony  was  attached  to  the  other,  and  yet  a  deviation  of 
i-6o,oooth  of  a  second  in  the  direction  of  the  gravitational 
force  would  have  produced  a  torsion  of  one  minute,  and  this 
would  have  been  accurately  observed." 

The  actual  deviation  of  the  pendulum  from  the  true  vertical 
due  to  centrifugal  force  is  about  360  seconds,  so  that  to  the 
accuracy  of  I  in  2  x  io7  the  ratio  of  dynamical  to  gravitational 
mass  is  shown  to  be  the  same  for  the  two  bodies.  . 

More  recent  experiments  by  Zeeman1  on  bodies  with  radio- 
active properties  show  the  same  result  to  a  degree  of  accuracy 
varying  between  2x1  o~7  and  3x1  o~8. 

69.  GRAVITATION  AND  A  BEAM  OF  LIGHT. 
If  we  are  led  by  these  considerations  to  think  that  the 
internal  energy  of  a  body  must  be  as  much  an  essential  factor 
in  determining  its  susceptibility  to  gravitational  influence  as  it 
is  in  determining  its  inertia,  a  natural  sequel  is  to  suppose  that 
the  purely  non-material  energy  in  a  light  wave,  and  the  inertia 
which  it  has  been  shown  to  possess,  will  also  in  some  way  be 
subject  to  gravitation  also.  But  a  difficulty  at  once  presents 
itself.  In  the  case  of  material  bodies,  gravitational  action 
always  shows  itself  in  accelerated  motion.  It  has  been  pointed 

Zeeman,  "  Verb.  d.  k.  Ak.  van  Wet,"  26  (1917),  p.  451. 


90         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

out  (§  67)  however  that,  as  one  of  the  consequences  of  the  special 
Principle  of  Relativity,  we  are  no  longer  bound  to  think  of  the 
momentum  of  a  body  as  being  in  the  same  direction  as,  or 
bearing  a  constant  ratio  to,  its  velocity.  The  velocity  may 
remain  constant,  but  a  change  in  the  internal  energy  or  stress 
may  yet  produce  a  change  in  the  momentum. 

Thus  we  have  to  ask  the  question :  If  there  is  a  gravita- 
tional action  upon  light,  will  it  be  evidenced  in  a  change  of 
velocity,  or  simply  in  a  change  in  the  nature  of  the  disturbance 
which  is  being  propagated  ? 

To  ask  the  question  is  to  admit  that  either  alternative  may 
prove  true.  It  is  in  following  the  consequences  of  the  first 
possibility  that  we  see  the  generalization  of  the  Principle  of 
Relativity  open  out. 

The  first  step  in  the  quest  is  to  consider  the  consequences  in 
the  ordinary  material  phenomenon  of  weight.  We  come  back 
to  Galileo  and  his  discovery  that  falling  bodies  have  all  the 
same  acceleration.  Does  light  then  share  in  this  acceleration  ? 

Another  way  of  putting  the  same  question  is  this  : — 

"  To  an  observer  who  was  falling  freely  in  a  gravitational 
field,  would  a  ray  of  light  appear  to  be  travelling  uniformly  in 
a  straight  line?" 

This  form  of  the  question  suggests  a  further  and  more 
general  consideration.  Would  it  be  true  that  to  such  an  observer 
all  perceptible  influence  of  gravitation  on  physical  phenomena 
of  every  kind  would  be  lost  ?  Or,  if  the  acceleration  were  only 
a  part  of  that  of  free  fall,  would  the  gravitational  influence 
on  all  kinds  of  phenomena  be  diminished  in  the  same  ratio  ? 

If  that  were  the  case  it  would  appear  that  the  nature  of 
gravitational  influence  is  strictly  comparable  with  the  nature  of 
those  effects  that  arise  from  an  acceleration  of  material  systems. 
Gravitational  forces  would  be  of  the  same  nature  as  the  so- 
called  centrifugal  force  apparent  in  the  case  of  rotating 
systems,  but  dismissed  by  the  Newtonian  as  fictitious. 

70.  ECONOMY  OF  THOUGHT. 

The  whole  of  the  discussion  of  the  special  Principle  of 
Relativity  was  guided  by  the  main  thought  of  preserving  the 


THE  GENERAL  THEORY  OF  RELATIVITY  91 

simplicity  of  the  relations  conceived  to  hold  between  the 
physical  phenomena.  No  one  ever  denied  that  other  frames 
of  reference  with  any  accelerations  or  rotations  and  arbitrary 
changes  of  co-ordinates  might  be  adopted  at  pleasure  by  those 
who  did  not  mind  giving  up  that  simplicity.  But  once  it  is 
granted  that  those  simple  relations  cannot  in  all  circumstances 
be  maintained  as  strictly  true,  the  case  for  a  limitation  of  the 
allowable  frames  of  reference  breaks  down.  As  long  as 
Newtonian  dynamics  were  the  last  word  in  physical  theory, 
it  was  of  no  avail  for  the  philosopher  to  say  that  the  mind 
could  not  conceive  of  absolute  rotation.  The  scientist  could 
only  reply  that  nature  certainly  made  a  distinction  between 
one  frame  of  reference  and  another ;  that  for  some  frames 
Newton's  simple  relations  did  hold,  and  for  others  they  did 
not.  But  now  the  retort  is  invalid.  The  Newtonian  equations 
are  only  approximately  true  in  any  case.  The  apparent 
simplicity  arises  because  the  frame  of  reference  is  chosen  in 
such  a  relation  to  the  phenomena  in  question  that  the  re- 
maining terms  become  inappreciable. 

71.  A  FRESH  START. 

With  this  in  mind  we  must  turn  back  and  see  how  far  pro- 
gress is  possible  along  the  lines  of  supposing  that  all  precon- 
ceptions are  given  up  as  to  the  precise  form  of  physical  laws. 

We  are  to  remember  that  the  use  of  space  and  time  co- 
ordinates is  simply  a  means  to  describing  the  relations  that 
hold  between  physical  phenomena ;  and  that,  as  was  said 
above  (§§  26  and  27),  if  we  assume  in  advance  a  specific  form 
for  some  physical  law,  we  are  in  reality  as  much  describing 
the  relation  of  our  system  of  measurement  to  the  phenomena 
as  describing  the  sequence  of  phenomena  themselves.  This 
will  perhaps  be  made  a  little  clearer  by  an  illustration  from 
two  dimensions. 

Two  maps  of  a  given  part  of  the  earth's  surface,  say  a  map 
on  the  Mercator  projection,  and  a  map  on  the  stereographic, 
can  easily  be  recognized,  in  spite  of  their  difference  in  shape, 
as  representing  the  same  region.  The  ordering  of  places  is 
distorted  but  not  broken.  If,  on  the  map,  the  curves  are 


92    RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

drawn  which  represent  the  shortest  distance  between  given 
points  (the  great  circles),  the  form  of  these  curves  will  enable 
us  to  recognize  what  system  of  projection  is  being  used.  In 
other  words  the  map  embodies  within  it  not  only  some  in- 
formation about  the  reality  which  it  pictures  ;  but,  if  the 
geodesies  are  drawn  upon  it,  it  gives  also  information  about 
the  mode  of  representation. 

We  are  to  think  of  the  metrical  description  of  physical 
phenomena  as  of  a  four-dimensional  map  of  the  history  of  the 
universe.  The  '  world  lines/  as  Einstein  calls  them,  are  the 
curves  which  in  the  map  represent  the  history  of  identifiable 
particles.  If  we  do  not  make  any  assumptions  in  advance  as 
to  the  form  of  the  world  lines  and  their  mutual  relations,  our 
mode  of  representation  is  quite  arbitrary.  By  changing  to 
another  mode  of  representation  the  world  lines  may  take  quite 
,  different  forms.  The  hypothesis  of  relativity  assumes  that 
no  one  form  is  more  true  or  actual  than  another.  They  are 
all  equally  valid  representations  of  reality. 

It  seems  at  first  sight  that,  if  we  contemplate  the  distortion 
and  stretching  of  the  map  to  an  arbitrary  degree,  there  is  no 
possibility  of  any  metrical  property  of  the  universe  being 
equally  well  represented  on  the  map  whatever  form  it  may 
take.  Yet  an  exact  physical  law  must  be  a  statement  of 
equality  which  holds  whatever  method  of  expressing  it  is  em- 
ployed. The  problem  set  to  himself  by  Einstein  and  satis- 
factorily answered  with  the  aid  of  pure  mathematics  already 
devised  in  other  connections,  was  just  that  of  finding  mathe- 
matical relations  which  satisfied  this  criterion. 

72.  AN  ESSENTIAL  CONDITION  OF  MATHEMATICAL 
REPRESENTATION. 

We  must  suppose  that  there  is  at  least  this  much  in 
common  between  all  the  possible  pictures  that  may  be  formed 
of  the  universe  and  its  history,  that  there  is  what  we  may  call 
an  exact  correspondence  of  events.  If  something  happens,  a 
collision  of  two  atoms,  a  tick  of  a  clock,  each  observer  will 
mark  it  as  happening  at  a  certain  place  and  a  certain  time ; 
and  though  they  do  not  use  the  same  methods  of  describing 


THE  GENERAL  THEORY  OF  RELATIVITY  93 

the  place  and  the  instant,  there  will  be  in  each  of  their  several 
four-dimensional  maps  of  all  the  happenings  a  definite  point 
corresponding  to  and  recording  this  event. 

It  must  be  a  definite  principle  that  there  is  what  mathe- 
maticians call  a  one-to-one  point-correspondence  between  all 
possible  representations  of  physical  phenomena. 

An  important  application  of  this  is  in  respect  of  what  has 
been  said  above  about  the  nature  of  experimental  observations. 
To  use  again  the  example  of  the  reading  of  a  galvanometer, 
we  merely  observe  a  coincidence  of  a  spot  of  light  with  a 
mark  on  a  scale.  This  is  what  we  have  just  called  an  event. 
In  each  several  map  of  the  universe  the  event  is  uniquely 
recorded  as  a  single  coincidence. 

Suppose  that  (xv  x^  x^  x^  are  the  four  variables  which  are 
used  by  one  observer  to  define  particular  events.  To  any 
particular  event  corresponds  a  unique  quartet  of  numbers  as 
the  corresponding  values  of  these  quantities,  and  vice  versa 
to  any  quartet  of  numbers  corresponds  only  one  event.  If 
another  observer  defines  the  event  by  another  set  of  variables 
(.*•/,  x^  x^  x^)  the  same  is  true  of  these. 

Thus  to  a  given  set  of  values  (x^  x^  x^  x^  corresponds  a 
unique  set  (x^  .  .  .  x^)  and  vice  versa. 

73.  THE  COMPLETE  RELATIVITY  OF  CO-ORDINATE 
SYSTEMS. 

The  special  Principle  of  Relativity  has  taught  us  there  is  ho 
distinction  in  character  between  the  time  and  space  co-ordinates. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  metaphysician  who  has  denied  the 
validity  of  an  absolute  scale  of  time,  or  of  space,  has  usually 
done  it  merely  on  the  ground  that,  so  long  as  the  ordering  in 
time  and  the  ordering  in  space  are  not  broken,  a  non-uniform 
stretching  of  the  time  variable  or  an  arbitrary  distortion  in 
space  may  be  contemplated. 

Put  mathematically  the  metaphysician  (previous  to  the 
Special  Principle  of  Relativity)  was  inclined  to  allow  that- 
taking  the  suffix  4  to  refer  to  the  time  variable  we  might 
allow  that  what  one  man  calls  a  fixed  point  another  may 
take  to  be  moving  in  any  manner  he  pleases — so  that 


94        RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 
x\    ~  fi  (*i>  Xtb  xv  x±) 


fi>  fv  fz  being  any  functions  whatever,  while  a  non-uniform 
stretching  of  the  time  scale  would  be  given  by  x±  =  f4  (x^). 

With  the  assimilation  of  space  and  time  variables  proposed 
by  Minkowski,  the  only  general  method  of  procedure  seems  to 
be  to  start  by  allowing  x^  x^  x^,  x±  each  to  be  any  arbitrary 
function  of  (xly  x^  xz,  x±). 

We  return  then  to  the  point  at  which  we  started  (Chapter 
III,  §  26)  to  construct  all  possible  systems  of  space  and  time 
measurement,  leaving  aside  the  hypothesis  of  constant  velocity, 
the  only  limiting  hypothesis  there  employed. 

74.  THE  GENERAL  QUADRATIC  FORM. 
That  hypothesis  was  bound  up  with  the  invariant  form  of 
the  quadratic  differential  expression 

dx*  +  dy*  +  dz*  -  c*dt\ 
\ix  is  any  function  of  x,  y,  zy  t,  say/(;tr,  y,  zt  t] 


Thus  on  substituting  expressions  such  as  this  for  dx  ',  dy', 
\  dt  we  find  that 


is  identically  equal  to  an  expression  of  the  form 


in  which  the  coefficients  ars  are  functions  of  x,  y,  2,  t.  The 
aggregate  of  these  coefficients  we  shall  call  the  tensor  ars 
(see  below  §  79).  With  an  arbitrary  change  of  co-ordinates,  the 
numerical  values  of  the  coefficients  are  not  kept  unaltered  as 
they  are  under  the  Lorentz  transformations  ;  though  the  general 
form  of  the  expression  as  a  homogeneous  quadratic  differential 
form  remains. 

75.  SOME  CONSEQUENCES  OF  A  GENERAL  CHANGE  OF 

CO-ORDINATES. 

Suppose  now  that  x  ',  y'}  z'  ,  /  are  ordinary  space-time  co- 
ordinates for  the  representation  of  physical  phenomena  in  a 
field  in  which  the  laws  are  of  the  classical  form,  in  which,  for 


THE  GENERAL  THEORY  OF  RELATIVITY     95 

example,  a  wave  of  light  is  propagated  uniformly  with 
velocity  c\  and  in  which  there  is  no  gravitation.  In  this 
picture,  if  we  follow  a  light  disturbance, 

dx*  +  dy"1  +  dz"*  -  (?dt;*  =  o. 

If  the  same  phenomena  are  pictured  by  means  of  relations 
between  xyyt  z,  and  t,  the  same  disturbance  will  be  propagated 
according  to  the  law 

a^cbP  +  2a^dxdy  .  .  .    +  a^df  =  o. 

If  we  seek  for  the  velocity  of  propagation  in  a  direction 
given  by 

dx  =  Ids,  dy  =  mds,  dz  =  nds, 
ds  being  the  actual  distance  travelled  we  have 


which  is  a  quadratic  equation  for  the  velocity  dsjdt.  For  the 
moment  the  only  interest  in  this  equation  is  that  the  circum- 
stances of  the  propagation  depend  upon  the  whole  set  of  co- 
efficients 


In  other  words,  the  physical  properties  of  space  as  con- 
ceived by  the  observer  using  the  co-ordinates  x^  y>  z,  t  will 
depend  upon  this  set  of  coefficients,  though  to  the  observer 
using  the  co-ordinates  x\  y,  z  >  /,  space  is  homogenous  and 
isotropic. 

Further,  if  this  latter  observer  notes  a  particle  moving 
freely,  that  is,  in  terms  of  Newtonian  laws,  moving  uniformly 
in  a  straight  line,  the  observer  who  pictures  its  motion  by 
means  of  x,  y,  z)  t  will  picture  it  as  moving  neither  uni- 
formly nor  in  a  straight  line. 

For  example,  if 

x  =  x  cos  a)/  +  y  sin  at    z  =  z 
and  y  =  x  sin  o>t  -  y  cos  wt,    tf  =  /, 

a  point  at  rest  as  mapped  in  the  co-ordinates  (xt  y,  z,  t) 
will  be  describing  a  circle  as  mapped  in  the  co-ordinates 
(JT , /,  z,  /),  the  angular  velocity  being  o>.  Similarly  a  particle 


96         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

moving  uniformly  in  a  straight  line  in  the  former  co-ordinates 
would  appear  to  be  moving  in  a  spiral  round  the  origin  in 
the  latter. 

Newton  observing  these  phenomena  would  infer  the  exist- 
ence of  some  influence  exerting  a  '  centripetal  force '  on  the 
moving  particle.  Einstein  is  aware  of  the  fact  that  he  is  only 
observing  the  facts  from  a  special  point  of  view,  and  finds  that 
by  adopting  another  picture  of  the  phenomena  the  necessity 
for  postulating  the  force  does  not  arise. 

More  generally,  taking  any  arbitrary  transformation  of 
co-ordinates,  and  using  quasi-geometrical  language,  the  history 
of  a  moving  particle  is  recorded  by  a  curve  drawn  in  the  four- 
dimensional  map  of  phenomena.  By  an  arbitrary  change  of 
co-ordinates  the  map  is  stretched  and  distorted  in  an  arbitrary 
manner,  subject  only  to  its  not  being  split — otherwise  one 
event  in  one  representation  would  be  split  into  two  distinct 
events  in  the  other.  Newton,  taking  only  one  representation, 
infers  from  the  straightness  or  otherwise  of  the  history-curves 
(world  lines)  of  particles  their  freedom  to  or  subjection  to 
external  force.  To  Einstein  '  force '  is  a  purely  relative  term, 
relative,  that  is,  to  the  particular  picture  he  employs. 

But  we  note  here,  in  the  passage  from  one  picture  to  the 
other,  that  the  same  quantities  which  affect  the  unequal 
velocity  of  propagation  of  light  affect  the  motion  of  the  free 
particle.  In  fact,  in  the  field  of  x\  y,  z' ,  /,  the  velocity  of 
light  is  given  by  ds  =  o  and  the  path  of  a  free  particle  is  such 
that  \ds  is  a  minimum. 

As  pictured  in  the  map  with  (x,  y,  2,  t)  co-ordinates  the 
principle  of  exact  correspondence  shows  that  since  numerically 
ds  =  ds  the  velocity  of  light  is  determined  by 

ds  =  o 

and  the  path  of  a  free  particle  by  \ds  taking  a  stationary  value. 
Since  ds*  =  a^cb?  +  .  .  .  the  coefficients  alt  .  .  .  determine 
the  course  of  both  phenomena. 

76.  THE  UNIVERSAL  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  THE  TENSOR  ars. 

We  now  see  why  the  tensor  ars  is  associated  by  Einstein 
with  the  gravitational  field.  Gravitation  is  the  name  we  have 


THE  GENERAL  THEORY  OF  RELATIVITY  97 

given  to  the  unseen  influence  which  is  evidenced  by  particles, 
otherwise  free,  exhibiting  non-uniform  motion.  Granting  the 
hypothesis  of  complete  relativity  we  cannot  say  of  a  deviation 
or  change  of  speed  in  the  motion  of  a  particle,  whether  it  is 
due  to  the  particular  frame  of  reference  used,  or  whether  it 
arises  from  entirely  external  causes.  We  cannot  distinguish 
between  a  *  real  '  gravitational  field  and  a  '  simulated  '  field.  We 
can  only  deal  with  the  actual  motions  perceived,  and  class  the 
whole  set  of  quantities  characterizing  those  motions  as  defining 
the  gravitational  field,  remembering,  however,  that  the  field  is 
relative  to  the  observer's  particular  system  of  measurement. 

In  the  case  of  what  we  may  call  a  completely  simulated 
field,  such  as  has  been  considered  in  the  preceding  section,  we 
see  that  the  whole  set  of  quantities  ars  is  necessary  to  describe 
the  field  as  apparent  to  any  particular  observer.  We  have 
seen  that  in  this  case  there  is  a  quadratic  expression  l 


which  for  a  given  pair  of  adjacent  events  has  the  same  value  for 
all  observers.  We  may  say  that  the  quantities  ars  define  the  ex- 
tent to  which  the  space-time  system  used  departs  from  isotropy 
and  homogeneity  in  regard  to  its  relation  to  physical  events. 

In  the  more  general  case  of  the  actual  universe  it  is  difficult 
to  imagine  that  the  whole  of  what  we  have  been  in  the  habit 
of  calling  "  gravitation  "  can  be  classed  as  a  fictitious  field  of 
force.  Nevertheless,  if  we  are  to  grant  the  complete  relativity 
of  our  space-time  notions  we  must  grant  that  we  are  not  in  a 
position  to  say  to  what  extent  it  is  fictitious  in  any  given 
frame  of  measurement.  The  only  plan  of  proceeding,  there- 
fore, seems  to  be  to  develop  a  scheme  of  relations  more  general 
than  those  which  have  been  taken  to  hold  in  a  purely  fictitious 
field  of  force,  but  including  those  as  a  particular  case. 

All  that  has  been  assumed  so  far  of  that  particular  case  is 
that  when  the  fictitious  field  has  been  transformed  right  away 
the  quadratic  expression 

+  dy"1  +  dz"*  -  <?dt'* 


1  It  is  a  great  convenience,  except  where  expressly  stated,  to  imply  that 
where  a  suffix  occurs  twice  in  an  expression  a  summation  is  to  be  effected  over 
the  values  i,  2,  3,  4  of  that  suffix. 

7 


98         RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

has  a  special  physical  significance,  in  relation  to  the  propaga- 
tion of  light  and  the  motion  of  a  free  particle.  In  this  case  all 
that  has  been  said  in  the  earlier  part  of  this  book  would  hold. 
But  if  we  are  now  dealing  with  the  case  of  a  field  that  cannot 
be  so  transformed  away,  all  that  is  left  of  our  hypotheses  is 
that  there  may  be  an  invariant  quadratic  form 

£Vs     rdx, 

(we  introduce  here  the  letter  gfs  instead  of  ars  in  conformity 
with  the  customary  notation) — in  which  the  coefficients  grs  are 
functions  of  the  co-ordinates,  and  depend  upon  the  particular 
set  of  co-ordinates  used  This  expression  has  a  value  in- 
dependent of  the  particular  set  of  co-ordinates,  and  to  that 
extent  is  capable  of  representing  some  metrical  property  of  the 
physical  universe  which  is  independent  of  any  particular  mode 
of  observation  and  method  of  measurement.  But  a  priori 
nothing  is  to  be  assumed  as  to  any  limitation  upon  the  co- 
efficients grs.  These  coefficients  are  characteristic  of  the 
particular  mode  of  measurement  adopted.  The  important 
thing  to  notice  here  is  that  inasmuch  as  grs  characterizes  the 
system  of  reference  from  which  the  whole  universe  is  regarded, 
there  will  be  no  class  of  phenomena  which  will  not  be  dependent 
upon  this  tensor.  In  other  words,  we  have  here  a  basis 
from  which  we  shall  be  able  to  consider  the  influence  of 
the  gravitational  field,  not  only  upon  the  motions  of  particles, 
but  upon  the  propagation  of  light,  the  motions  of  electrons, 
or  of  any  other  property  of  matter  we  may  select. 

77.  EINSTEIN'S  PROBLEM. 

We  have  so  far  proceeded  mainly  by  way  of  giving  up 
definite  results  which  classical  theory  had  regarded  as  funda- 
mental. 

It  would  seem  that  such  a  thoroughgoing  jettison  of  all 
definite  hypotheses  would  leave  little  hope  of  arriving  at 
anything  in  the  way  of  a  precise  physical  law.  Let  us  note 
therefore,  in  a  very  much  simpler  instance,  how  what  appears 
to  be  a  negative  hypothesis  actually  suggests  a  known  law. 
Returning  to  Newtonian  conceptions,  let  us  think  of  a  scalar 
gravitational  potential  <£  with  a  definite  value  at  each  point 
of  space,  and  ask  ourselves  what  possible  connections  may 


THE  GENERAL  THEORY  OF  RELATIVITY  99 

exist  between  such  a  potential  and  the  density  of  matter  p 
also  defined  for  each  point  of  space  —  on  the  single  hypothesis 
that  space  is  isotropic,  that  is,  that  all  directions  at  a  point  are 
alike  ;  or,  in  other  words,  on  the  hypothesis  that  the  form  of 
all  physical  laws  remains  the  same  no  matter  how  the  co- 
ordinate system  is  changed  provided  only  that  dx*+dy*+dz* 
is  invariant. 

The  problem  is  thus  :  we  are  given  two  quantities  p  and  (f> 
at  every  point;  what  types  of  relation  between  these  two 
quantities  could  possibly  hold  without  reference  to  any  special 
directions  in  space? 

If  we  had  been  thoroughly  brought  up  in  the  analysis  of 
vectors  we  should  at  once  remember  that  there  is  a  scalar 
quantity  V2<£  which  has  no  relation  to  any  special  direction 
at  a  point  ;  and  at  once,  if  we  begin  to  look  for  the  simplest 
relations  that  may  hold  between  <f)  and  p, 

V2<£  =  kp 
suggests  itself  as  one  possibility. 

This  then  suggests  the  method  of  approach  adopted  by 
Einstein  towards  this  gravitation  problem. 

Here  is  the  universe,  mapped  out  according  to  the  arbitrary 
choice  of  an  observer  as  a  space-time  field.  This  observer 
perceives  or  interprets  his  physical  universe  as  having  certain 
gravitational  properties  characterized  by  the  set  of  quantities 
£VS,  and  as  occupied  by  a  certain  distribution  of  moving  matter, 
with  energy  and  momentum. 

His  problem  is  to  envisage  the  possible  relations  between 
the  quantities  grs  and  the  matter  distribution. 

He  has  to  guide  him  :  — 

(i)  The  gravitational  theory  of  Newton,  extremely  satis- 
factory as  far  as  it  goes,  in  which  the  gravitational 
field  is  represented  by  a  single  potential  satisfying 


This  at  once  suggests  that  the  relations  sought  must  be,  at 
the  simplest,  differential  equations  of  the  second  order. 

(ii)  The  criterion  that  whatever  relations  are  chosen  must 
be  equally  valid  whatever  may  be  the  arbitrary  manner 
of  depicting  the  universe  in  terms  of  space  and  time. 

7* 


ioo       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

With  regard  to  the  preservation  of  the  form  of  the  relations 
in  an  arbitrary  distortion  of  the  four  dimensional  map,  we  note 
that  the  set  of  quantities  g^  will  in  such  an  arbitrary  distortion 
differ  from  the  corresponding  quantities  say  grs,  at  the  cor- 
responding point.  Likewise  their  differential  coefficients  with 
respect  to  the  co-ordinates  will  take  new  values. 

The  problem  then  is  to  examine  what  types  of  relation 
connecting  the  quantities  grs  and  their  differential  coefficients, 
will  represent  exactly  the  same  quantitative  results  as  the 
same  relation  connecting  the  quantities  g^  and  their  differential 
coefficients  with  respect  to  the  new  co-ordinates. 

For  the  solution,  the  necessary  pure  mathematics  was 
fortunately  to  hand.  We  cannot  do  more  here  than  refer  to 
its  originators.1  Christoffel  (1869)  attacked  this  specific  prob- 
lem, and  his  work  forms  the  foundation  of  the  necessary 
calculus.  Riemann,  however,  with  his  peculiar  genius,  gave 
significance  to  the  work  of  Christoffel  by  showing  its  intimate 
relation  to  the  geometry  of  surfaces,  and  by  his  investigation 
of  the  possibilities  of  a  geometry  in  more  than  three  dimensions. 
This  will  form  the  subject  of  the  next  section,  but  we  must 
acknowledge  here  the  debt  due  to  Ricci  and  Levi-Civita  who 
systematized  the  work  of  these  two  pioneers  and  left  it  in  a 
form  ready  for  the  physicist  to  use. 

78.  GEOMETRICAL — RIEMANN'S  CONTRIBUTION. 
In  1854  Riemann  submitted  to  the  University  of  Gottingen 
a  thesis  "On  the  Hypotheses  which  lie  at  the  Bases  of 
Geometry,"  in  which  he  arrived  for  questions  of  measurement 
in  three  dimensions  at  very  much  the  same  position  as  that  at 
which  we  have  now  arrived  in  problems  of  motion.  In  order 

1  For  an  introduction  to  the  mathematical  literature  of  the  whole  subject,  see 
J.  E.  Wright,  "  Invariants  of  Quadratic  Differential  Forms,"  Cambridge  Tracts 
in  Mathematics,  No.  9. 

E.  B.  Christoffel,  "  Crelle's  Journal  fur  die  Math.,"  LXX.,  1869. 

B.  Riemann,  "  Uber  die  Hypothesen  welche  der  Geometrie  zugrunde  liegen," 
Math.  Werke  (1876),  p.  272. 

"  Commentatio  Mathematica,"  Math.  Werke,  p.  370. 

The  former  paper  was  translated  by  W.  K.  Clifford  and  published  in 
"  Nature,"  1873. 

Ricci  and  Levi-Civita,  "  Methodes  de  calcul  differential  absolu,"  Mathema- 
tischeiAnnalen,  54,  1901. 


THE  GENERAL  TKEO&Y  OF  R'ELAVrVltV  101 

to  extract  the  logical  essence  of  geometrical  relations,  stripped 
of  all  preconceptions  which  may  possibly  be  based  on  muscular 
sensations  of  extent,  ocular  sensations  of  symmetry  and  the  like, 
he  seeks  to  reduce  geometry  first  to  an  arithmetical  basis.  This 
is  exactly  what  mathematical  physics  seeks  to  do.  A  point  in 
three-dimension  space  is  for  him  merely  a  set  of  three  numbers. 
The  distance  between  two  points  is  merely  some  expression 
in  terms  of  the  differences  of  corresponding  numbers  which 
may  act  as  a  measure  of  the  separateness  of  those  points. 
The  only  property  that  he  demands  of  this  measure  is  that  it 
should  vanish  when  the  two  points  coincide,  and  should  be 
essentially  a  positive  quantity  if  the  two  points  do  not  coincide 
(cf.  what  has  been  said  above  as  to  coincidences  in  physical 
measurements).  The  simplest  type  of  expression  satisfying 
this  criterion  for  two  near  points  he  takes  to  be  ds,  the  positive 
square  root  of  a^dxydx^  the  coefficients  ars  being  limited 
only  by  the  condition  that  the  expression  is  always  positive. 

The  problem  now  arises,  however,  as  to  what  further 
limitations  upon  these  coefficients  may  be  necessary  as  a 
consequence  of  the  fact  that  all  the  points  considered  connect 
together  to  form  a  continuous  whole. 

As  an  illustration  let  us  think  for  a  moment  of  four  points 
of  some  two-dimensional  surface  and  their  six  mutual  distances. 
If  the  surface  is  plane  any  five  of  these  distances  determine  the 
relative  positions  of  the  four  points  and  hence  determine  the 
sixth  distance.  Thus,  if  the  six  distances  are  arbitrarily  as- 
signed, the  four  points  will  not  in  general  be  coplanar. 

Extending  this,  if  a  surface  is  defined,  and  the  position  of 
any  point  upon  it  is  marked  by  two  variable  quantities  X,  /t, 
the  distance  between  two  consecutive  points  being  given  by 

d?  =  AafX2  +  T&dKdp,  +  Cdp?. 

A,  B,  C  being  arbitrary  functions  of  X  and  //,,  it  will  not  in 
general  be  possible  that  the  points  should  piece  together  into 
a  plane  surface ;  though  there  will  in  general  be  an  infinite 
number  of  curved  surfaces  into  which  they  will  piece  together. 
It  is  possible  to  write  down  an  expression  involving  the 
quantities  A,  B,  C,  and  their  differential  coefficients  with 
regard  to  X  and  /t,  the  vanishing  of  which  for  all  values  of  X 


1 02       RELATIVITY  AND :fff£- ELECTRON  THEOR Y 

and  /j,  is  a  necessary  and  sufficient  condition  that  a  plane 
surface  may  be  so  constructed.  If  this  condition  is  not 
satisfied,  this  quantity  necessarily  has  the  same  value  at  corre- 
sponding points  of  all  possible  surfaces.  It  is  called  the 
"  specific  curvature  ". 

In  exactly  the  same  way  if  we  are  dealing  with  a  three- 
dimensional  region,  the  six  distances  of  four  points  in  ordinary 
space  are  arbitrary  and  unrelated,  but  if  a  fifth  point  be  added 
only  three  of  its  distances  from  the  other  four  can  be  chosen 
arbitrarily,  that  is,  a  certain  identical  relation  must  hold 
between  the  ten  mutual  distances.  As  a  consequence  of  this  it 
is  found  that  an  expression  ds2  =  arsdxrdxs  cannot,  as  a  rule, 
satisfactorily  represent  the  distance  between  two  points  if 
they  are  to  piece  together  into  a  continuous  three-dimensional 
construct  (a  so-called  Euclidean  space). 

Riemann  in  fact  is  able  to  write  down  six  independent 
functions  of  ars  and  their  first  and  second  differential  co- 
efficients with  regard  to  the  co-ordinates  which  must  vanish 
if  this  is  to  be  so.  For  convenience  we  will  give  them  his 
symbolism  :  Bj^  (/t,  z/,  a,  p  =  I,  2,  3).  Of  the  equations 
B^o-  =  o  only  six  are  independent. 

It  is  possible,  however,  from  Riemann's  arithmetical  point 
of  view,  to  think  of  them  piecing  together  into  a  three-dimen- 
sional region  which  is,  so  to  speak,  a  curved  region  in  a  four- 
dimensional  world. 

In  such  a  region  a  system  of  geometry  can  be  built  up 
using  the  given  expression  for  the  element  of  distance,  just  as 
we  may  have  a  two-dimensional  geometry  on  the  surface  of  a 
sphere.  Some  of  the  metrical  results  of  Euclidean  geometry 
will  cease  to  be  true.  For  example,  the  three  angles  of  a 
triangle  on  a  sphere  are  not  together  equal  to  two  right  angles. 
It  remains  true  on  a  sphere  that  the  angles  at  the  base  of  an 
isosceles  triangle  are  equal,  and  that  two  triangles  whose  sides 
are  equal,  each  to  each,  are  congruent,  that  is,  may  be  brought 
into  complete  coincidence.  But  neither  of  these  two  pro- 
positions is  true  if  the  triangles  are  on  a  surface  of  which  the 
curvature  is  not  the  same  at  all  points,  as,  for  instance,  an 
egg-shaped  surface. 


THE  GENERAL  THEORY  OF  RELATIVITY  103 

A  being  whose  knowledge  was  limited  to  the  perception  of 
objects  in  such  a  two-dimensional  universe,  discovering  this 
fact  of  lack  of  congruence  and  having  no  conception  of  three 
dimensions,  could  only  say  either  that  all  objects  were  limited 
in  their  freedom  of  movement,  or  else  that  their  dimensions 
were  altered  when  they  were  displaced  from  one  position  to 
another  according  to  some  local  properties  of  the  places  in 
which  they  were  put.  Such  alteration  might  reasonably  be 
interpreted  by  such  a  being  as  due  to  some  field  of  force.  We 
who  live  in  three  dimensions  on  the  other  hand  ascribe  it 
simply  to  the  limitations  of  the  observer's  universe. 

79.  EXTENSION  TO  A  HIGHER  NUMBER  OF  DIMENSIONS. 

Our  ordinary  systems  of  pure  geometry  based  on  a  general 
notion  of  absolute  direction  and  absolute  length  express  the 
properties  of  surfaces  in  a  form  which  is  independent  of  any 
particular  choice  of  numerical  co-ordinates.  In  reducing  his 
geometry  to  a  purely  arithmetical  basis,  Riemann  has  therefore 
to  replace  the  intuitive  geometrical  notions  by  a  mathematical 
proof  that  the  equations  developed  represent  the  same  truths 
whatever  be  the  system  of  co-ordinates  adopted,  so  that  no  one 
system  is  to  be  preferred  to  another.  This  is  completely 
parallel  with  the  Principle  of  Relativity,  which  extends  this  to 
all  the  phenomena  of  motion. 

Having  reduced  geometry  to  a  numerical  basis  the  way  is 
clear  for  an  extension  of  the  number  of  dimensions,  and 
Riemann  proceeds  to  the  discussion  of  this.  Any  set  of 
co-ordinates  being  x^  xz,  x^  x^  and  the  element  of  length 
being  given  by 


the  condition  that  the  elements  may  fit  together  into  a  four- 
dimension  space  is  again  expressed  by  the  equation  BJ^.  =  o, 
but  there  are  now  twenty  independent  expressions  instead  of 
six.  If  these  expressions  (B£vo.)  do  not  vanish  two  interpreta- 
tions are  open  to  the  observer.  The  first  is  that  there  is  a  fifth 
dimension,  and  that  for  some  reason  his  four-dimensional 
universe  is  a  curved  section  of  this,  the  quantities  B£v<r  being 
measures  of  the  curvature.  Or  on  the  other  hand  if  he  has  no 


104       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

power  to  think  into  five  dimensions,  he  will  naturally  attribute 
properties  varying  from  point  to  point  of  his  four-dimensional 
world  which  will  correspond  to  the  existence  of  physical 
phenomena  in  that  world.  As  Riemann  puts  it,  "we  must 
seek  the  ground  of  its  measure  relations,  in  binding  forces 
which  act  upon  it  ". 

If  they  do  vanish  Riemann  shows  that  there  is  a  system  of 
co-ordinates  in  which  the  element  of  length  is  the  ordinary 
expression 

ds*  =  dx?  +  dx?  +  dx*  +  dx? 

or,  in  geometrical  language  the  measure  relations  are  those  of 
Euclidean  space,  x^  x%,  xz,  x^  being  then  a  set  of  rectangular 
co-ordinates. 

80.  APPLICATION  TO  PHYSICAL  THEORY,  CONDITIONS  FOR 
ABSENCE  OF  REAL  GRAVITATIONAL  FIELD. 

Without  using  any  of  the  geometrical  language  of  the 
preceding  section,  which  has  been  inserted  by  way  of  illus- 
tration, we  may  quote  this  main  result  of  the  mathematical 
theory. 

There  are  twenty  independent  combinations  of  the  quantities 
grs  and  their  first  and  second  differential  co-efficients  with  respect 
to  the  co-ordinates,  the  vanishing  of  which  gives  the  conditions 
that  the  element  ds*  can  by  a  suitable  change  of  co-ofdinates  be 
put  in  the  form 

ds*  =  dx*  +  dy*  +  de2  -  <?dt\ 

If  this  is  the  case,  and  an  observer  used  these  co-ordinates, 
a  free  particle  would  appear  to  describe  a  straight  line  uni- 
formly and  light  would  travel  in  straight  lines — there  would 
in  fact  be  no  evidence  of  any  gravitational  effect. 

These  quantities  being  denoted  by  B£va.  the  equations 

B^  =  o 

express  then  the  condition  for  the  absence  of  a  real  gravitational 
field. 

8 1.  EXTENSION  TO  INCLUDE  A  REAL  GRAVITATIONAL 

FIELD. 

Now  our  ordinary  experience  is  that  gravitation  and  matter 
are  intimately  allied  with  one  another,  and  we  shall  not  expect 


THE  GENERAL   THEORY  OF  RELATIVITY  105 

that  we  shall  be  able  in  the  material  universe  to  choose  a 
frame  of  co-ordinates  which  shall  entirely  transform  away  the 
gravitational  field.  In  the  case  therefore  where  the  functions 
B£v(r  do  not  all  vanish,  the  question  arises  as  to  how  they  are 
to  be  related  to  the  presence  of  matter  in  the  field. 
Looking  back  to  the  familiar  Laplace  equation 

.**- 

l*z*  ' 

and  having  come  to  the  conclusion  that  the  gravitational  field 
must  be  described  in  terms  of  the  tensor  g^v  instead  of  the 
single  quantity  <£,  Einstein  looks  for  a  set  of  equations  in 
number  equal  to  the  number  of  ^-'s,  differential  equations  of  the 
second  order,  which  are  satisfied  in  the  particular  case  of 
a  purely  fictitious  field,  that  is  when  Bj^  =  o,  but  which  are 
more  general  in  character.  These  equations  must  of  course 
retain  their  form  under  any  arbitrary  change  of  co-ordinates. 

Putting  GM,  =  2P  B^p,  (p=  i,  2y  3,  4),  it  is  found  that  the 
set  of  equations 

G^v  =  o 

satisfies  all  the  necessary  criteria  for  being  a  suitable  extension 
of  the  equation  V2$  =  o,  the  equation  satisfied  by  the  gravi- 
tational field  at  a  point  not  actually  occupied  by  matter. 

It  is  shown  that  if  a  change  of  co-ordinates  be  made  whereby  g^v 
change  into  g'^vy  and  GMI/  into  G'^.v  then  the  equations  connecting  G'Mv 
with  GMV  are  identical  with  those  connecting  g^v  with  g^v.  Such  a  set 
of  quantities  is  said  to  be  a  covariant  tensor  of  the  second  order.  Einstein 
seizes  upon  these  equations,  and  takes  them  as  characteristic  of  a  region 
not  occupied  by  matter.  We  shall  see  later  how  he  was  able  to  make  use 
of  them. 

Summary  of  Mathematical  Formulation. 

ds*  =  gndxidxs  (i) 

b,  =  grso",     s  =  I,  2,  3,  4 
and  these  equations  are  solved  to  give  a3  in  terms  of  br  we  write 

as  =  g*b,          .         .         .      (ii) 


{pv,  X}  =  g^jafj  a]  .          .          .      (iv) 


106       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

BPM<r  =  \iiff,  e}  {ev,  p}  -  {iw>  e]  {e<r,  p}  +  —  {^cr,  p]  -  —  {pv,  p}  (v) 

G^-B;,,  .         .     (vi) 

As  always,  it  is  implied  that  summations  are  to  be  affected  with  regard  to 
the  suffixes  which  occur  twice  in  all  these  expressions,  viz.  :— 
r  in  (ii),  a  in  (iv),  e  in  (v),  and  p  in  (vi). 

82.  THE  PATH  OF  A  FREE  PARTICLE  HAS  STATIONARY 

LENGTH. 

Although  Einstein's  guess  at  a  possible  form  of  the  equa- 
tions was  actually  arrived  at  along  the  lines  just  indicated,  it 
will  perhaps  enable  the  reader  to  get  a  firmer  hold  of  the  fact 
that  a  set  of  differential  equations  expressed  in  terms  of  a 
special  set  of  co-ordinates  in  reality  embodies  a  fact  entirely 
independent  of  the  interpretation  in  terms  of  space  and  time 
which  is  attached  to  those  co-ordinates,  if  we  express  them  in 
a  different  but  equivalent  form. 

In  Newtonian  dynamics  we  know  that  a  particle  in  a  field 
in  which  there  is  no  force  acting  on  it  moves  in  a  straight  line 
uniformly.  In  the  four-dimensional  picture  of  its  motion  in 
which  the  Newtonian  space  and  time  co-ordinates  are  actually 
used,  the  motion  of  the  particle  is  represented  by  a  straight 
line,  that  is,  a  line  such  that  the  differences  in  the  space  co- 
ordinates of  two  positions  of  the  particle  are  proportional  to 
the  difference  in  the  time  co-ordinate. 

We  recall  the  identification  of  a  straight  line  as  the  shortest 
distance  between  two  points.  The  length  of  a  line  in  a  four- 
dimensional  picture  is  to  be  defined  thus.  In  the  absence  of 
a  gravitational  field  the  interval  between  two  adjacent  points 
has  been  defined  in  terms  of  the  small  differences  of  co- 
ordinates, thus — 

ds*  =   -  dx*  -  dx?  -  dx*  +  dx*. 

Let  a  series  of  points  be  taken  along  the  curve  and  the 
sum  of  the  intervals  between  each  point  and  the  next  be  cal- 
culated. We  find  the  limit  to  which  this  sum  tends  as  the  sub- 
division of  the  line  becomes  finer  and  finer,  and  we  call  this 
sum  the  total  interval  between  the  terminal  points  for  the 
given  curve. 


THE  GENERAL  THEORY  OF  RELATIVITY     107 

Denoting  this  by  \ds>  it  is  clear  that  if  the  curve  is  changed, 
the  length  of  it  is  in  general  changed.  But  let  the  curve  be 
straight,  in  the  sense  spoken  of  above,  and  then  let  it  be  bent 
a  little  out  of  the  straight  by  giving  to  each  point  of  it  an 
arbitrary  small  displacement.  The  mathematician  can  show, 
by  what  is  known  as  the  calculus  of  variations,  that  such  a 
slight  displacement  will,  to  the  first  order  of  small  quantities, 
leave  the  total  length  of  the  curve  unaltered.  We  say  that  it 
has  a  stationary  value.  Further,  it  is  capable  of  proof  that 
the  straight  line  is  the  only  curve  for  which  this  is  true.  This 
is  the  equivalent  of  the  shortest  length  property  of  the 
Euclidean  straight  line. 

Thus  the  path  of  a  free  particle  in  the  absence  of  any 
gravitation  is  such  that  \ds  is  stationary,  for  any  slight  varia- 
tion from  its  passage  between  two  given  point  instants.  For 
convenience  the  term  ' geodesic'  may  be  used  to  connote  this 
property,  a  term  borrowed  from  the  geometry  of  curves  on 
surfaces.  But  we  do  not  conclude  that  the  total  interval  is  a 
true  minimum.  As  a  matter  of  fact  it  is  in  general  a  maximum.1 

83.  THE  GEODESIC  PROPERTY  A  RELATIVE  ONE. 

Consider  the  picture  of  the  same  particle  in  the  same  con- 
ditions merely  by  transforming  co-ordinates.  In  the  new 
picture  there  is  what  we  have  spoken  of  as  a  fictitious  gravita- 
tional field.  The  particle  will  freely  obey  this  field,  but  its 
world-line  will  no  longer  be  straight.  But,  inasmuch  as  there 
is  an  exact  point-to-point  correspondence  between  the  two 
pictures,  and  the  separation  of  two  adjacent  points  ds  is 
the  same  in  both,  the  path  in  the  transformed  picture  will  be 
also  a  geodesic. 

At  this  point  we  recall  what  has  been  said  of  the 
equivalence  of  a  fictitious  and  essential  gravitational  field. 
Thus  we  pass  naturally  to  the  hypothesis  that  the  path  of  a 
particle  in  any  field  is  such  that  the  total  separation  of  the  initial 
and  final  configurations  is  stationary. 

1  Because  we  have  taken    dsz  =  -  dx^  -  dxzz  -  dx3z  +  dx4" 
instead  of  dsz  =      dx*  +  dx2z  +  dx3*  -  dx4*. 


io8       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

This  brings  us  to  the  mathematical  problem  of  rinding  the 
path  for  which  f/ 


is  stationary  as  the  equivalent  of  the  problem  of  finding  how 
a  free  particle  will  move  in  a  field  of  gravitational  force 
characterized  by  the  tensor  gvi. 

So  far,  of  course,  the  precise  relation  of  this  tensor  to  the 
ordinary  gravitational  potential  has  not  been  shown.  This  will 
appear  later  when  we  take  some  particular  cases. 

In  the  same  way,  in  the  complete  absence  of  a  gravitational 
field,  real  or  fictitious,  we  come  back  to  the  equation  of  pro- 
pagation of  a  ray  of  light  as 

ds  =  o. 

In  a  purely  fictitious  field  the  same  equation  must  be  satisfied, 
and,  in  a  field  which  is  not  entirely  fictitious,  the  assumption  that 
the  same  equation  holds  will  satisfy  the  hypotheses  of  Einstein. 
It  remains  to  be  seen  whether  it  agrees  with  experiment. 

84.  HAMILTON'S  PRINCIPLE  OF  STATIONARY  ACTION. 

In  passing  to  the  wider  field  of  physical  phenomena  in 
general,  we  take  up  the  suggestions  from  various  quarters1 
that,  in  the  re-thinking  of  physical  theory,  the  Principle  of 
Least  Action  is  that  which  stands  least  in  need  of  modification. 

We  have  seen  in  regard  to  the  special  Principle  of  Rela- 
tivity that  that  Principle  not  only  left  the  action  principle 
standing  —  but  that  the  action  was  an  invariant  quantity,  in  fact 
the  only  quantity  associated  with  material  systems  which  had 
a  value  independent  of  the  space-time  system  of  measurement. 

We  naturally,  therefore,  look  for  a  quantity  which  is 
invariant  under  the  most  general  transformation,  and,  having 
found  one,  examine  whether  the  consequences  of  treating  this 
quantity  as  the  action  will  lead  to  laws  at  all  consonant  with 
the  known  phenomena. 

The  researches  of  Riemann  give  us  at  once  a  quantity  that 
is  invariant,  namely,  the  quantity  G  =  2  ^  g^v  GMV,  the  sum- 

mation being  made  over  all  possible  sets  of  values  of  /i,  v. 
This  is  a  quantity  defined  for  each  point  of  the  four-dimen- 
sional world  (that  is,  of  time  and  space). 

1  Particularly  by   Sir  Joseph  Larmor,   "  ^Ether  and  Matter,"  and  elsewhere. 


THE  GENERAL  THEORY  OF  RELATIVITY  109 

85.  NOTE  ON  THE  GEOMETRICAL  SIGNIFICANCE  OF  G. 

Here  the  work  of  the  geometers,  referred  to  above  (§  78), 
is  of  fundamental  importance.  Gauss  showed  that  if  a  surface 
of  inextensible  but  flexible  material  be  deformed — the  geo- 
metrical conditions  being  merely  that  the  distance  between 
two  neighbouring  points  does  not  alter,  then  throughout  all  the 
changes  of  shape  that  the  surface  may  undergo  there  is  one 
quantity  associated  with  each  point  of  the  surface  that  does  not 
change.  He  called  it  the  specific  curvature  ;  in  the  language  of 
the  geometry  of  surfaces  it  is  the  product  of  the  curvatures  of 
the  principal  sections  of  the  surface  at  the  point.  Its  value  is 
determined  simply  by  the  nature  of  the  surface,  and  is,  there- 
fore, quite  unconcerned  with  any  particular  mathematical 
mode  of  defining  the  position  of  a  point  on  the  surface. 

This  can  be  generalized,  following  up  the  lead  given  by 
Riemann  to  any  number  of  dimensions.  For  our  purpose 
here  it  is  sufficient  to  know  that  in  any  four-dimensional  con- 
nected region  built  up  of  fixed  measured  elements  of  fixed  length 
there  is  an  invariant  quantity  associated  with  each  point — we 
may  call  it  the  generalized  curvature — though  that  phrase  has  no 
meaning  except  in  relation  to  a  hypothetical  five-dimensional 
space  in  which  the  four-dimensional  region  is  drawn  as  an 
ordinary  surface  is  drawn  in  three-dimensional  space.  This 
quantity  depends  only  on  the  mutual  relations  between  the 
lengths  of  neighbouring  elements,  and  not  upon  any  particular 
analytical  method  of  specification.  It  is  thus  that  the  invariant 
quantity  G  is  reached. 

86.  INVARIANT  ELEMENT  OF  INTEGRATION. 

In  §62  in  which  the  electro-magnetic  field  was  being 
considered  in  relation  to  the  principle  of  least  action,  it  was 
remarked  that  under  the  Lorentz-Einstein  transformations,  the 
element  of  integration  in  the  four-dimensional  world  was 
invariant.  This  was  clear  because  those  transformations 
consisted  merely  in  regarding  the  same  element  from  a  set  of 
co-ordinates  obtained  from  the  old  by  a  mere  turning  round 
of  the  axes. 

In  the  present  general  theory,   in  order  to  compare  the 


i  io       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

contents  of  the  given  element  as  portrayed  in  two  separate 
sets  of  co-ordinates,  we  have  to  remember  that  we  not  only 
turn  the  axes  about  but  we  may  stretch  and  warp  the  picture. 
We  find,  however,  that  the  element  of  the  four-dimensional 
space  is  increased  in  exactly  the  same  ratio  that  Jg  is 
diminished  ;  1  so  that  there  is  an  invariant  element  Jg  ^ID. 

87.  HYPOTHETICAL  EXPRESSION  FOR  ACTION. 

We  thus  arrive  at  an  expression  which  for  any  given  region 
of  the  four  dimensional  world  is  an  invariant,  viz  :  — 


The  subject  of  integration  here  is  simply  a  function  of  the 
quantities  grs  and  their  first  and  second  differential  coefficients 
in  regard  to  the  co-ordinates. 

For  a  field  in  which  gravitation  can  be  completely  trans- 
formed away,  a  field  which  has  previously  been  called  a 
Galilean  field,  the  gravitation  being  as  we  have  said  com- 
pletely fictitious,  the  value  of  G  is  zero. 

The  conditions  that  this  integral  shall  not  change  its  value 
(to  the  first  order)  when  arbitrary  small  changes  are  given  to 
the  £-'s,  are  found  to  be  exactly  that  set  of  differential  equations 
upon  which  Einstein  first  alighted  as  the  simplest  with  which 
the  repertory  of  the  pure  mathematicians  could  furnish  him, 
viz  :  — 

GM,  -  o. 

Thus  we  are  able  to  put  Einstein's  theory  in  this  comprehen- 
sive form,  that  there  is  a  numerical  quantity  which  can  be 
calculated  out  of  the  distribution  of  the  gravitational  field,  the 
value  of  which  is  entirely  independent  of  the  choice  of  the  observer 
as  to  the  means  by  which  he  describes  the  positions  and  motions 
of  the  material  bodies  ;  and  that  the  distribution  of  the  field  is 
always  such  as  to  make  this  value  stationary  as  compared  with  the 
value  of  any  slightly  differing  field. 

Lg  stands  for  the  determinant 

ll>  ^12'  ^13'  g 


THE  GENERAL  THEOR  Y  OF  RELA  TIV1TY  1  1  1 

88.  THE  MATTER  TENSOR. 

Returning  to  the  explicit  differential  equations  adopted  by 
Einstein,  it  is  necessary  to  contemplate  what  happens  at  points 
at  which  GMV  does  not  vanish.  If  G^v  =  o  is  the  equation 
characteristic  of  the  absence  of  matter,  the  expression  GMV  must 
measure  the  relevant  properties  of  matter.  Our  conception  of 
those  properties  may  have  to  be  revised  to  meet  the  new 
theory.  We  have  already  learned  the  interdependence  of 
energy  and  momentum,  and  the  relative  nature  of  force  and 
stress.  We  can  therefore  only  say  at  present  that  there  must 
be  a  relation  of  the  form 


where  0^  is  some  tensor  which  is  characteristic  of  the  state  of 
matter  at  a  point.  The  fact  that  it  is  a  tensor  will  ensure  that 
the  equation  represents  a  physical  relation  independent  of  the 
choice  of  the  system  of  co-ordinates. 

We  speak  of  0MI,  as  the  matter  tensor  or  the  energy  tensor. 
Its  relation  to  the  motion  of  the  matter  and  the  ordinary  con- 
ceptions of  the  properties  of  matter  may  for  the  moment  be 
left  ;  but  it  should  be  emphasized  that  the  above  equation 
does  no  more  than  identify  certain  aspects  of  the  gravitational 
field  with  the  matter.  It  associates  together  the  curvature  of 
the  measure  system  as  defined  by  the  quantities  GM|/  and  the 
life  history  of  material  bodies. 

89.  THE  LAWS  OF  CONSERVATION  IN  EINSTEIN'S  THEORY. 

In  the  old  mechanics,  three  laws  stand  out  prominently, 
the  laws  of  conservation  of  mass,  of  momentum,  and  of  energy. 
In  Einstein's  early  theory  of  relativity,  and  indeed  prior  to  that, 
the  conservation  of  mass  ceased  to  have  validity  ;  we  have  seen 
that  the  idea  of  constant  mass  is  intimately  associated  with  that 
of  constant  internal  energy  (p.  80). 

But  the  laws  of  conservation  of  momentum  and  energy 
remain  in  Einstein's  theory  ;  in  fact  they  can  be  shown  to  be 
an  immediate  consequence  of  his  law  of  gravitation.  The 
relation  of  these  laws  of  conservation  to  the  general  laws  of 


ii2       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

the  field  may  be  put  thus.     Starting  from  the  expression  for 
the  action, 


an  integral  through  all  space  of  a  function  of  g^v  and  its 
differential  coefficients,  two  conditions  have  to  be  satisfied. 

(i)  A  is  invariant  when  a  change  of  co-ordinates  is  made 
with  a  corresponding  change  in  g^v. 

(ii)  SA  =  o  when  arbitrary  changes  Sg^  are  given  to  the 

tensor^. 

Now  it  is  quite  easy  to  see  that  the  conditions  that  (ii)  may 
be  so,  include  the  conditions  for  (i).  The  condition  for  (ii)  is 
in  fact  Einstein's  equation 

GMV  =  o. 

If  G  were  not  known  to  be  invariant  these  would  be  ten 
independent  equations,  but  if  G  is  invariant  there  are  four 
expressions  derivable  from  the  ten  quantities  G^v  which  vanish 
identically  whether  G^v  =  o  or  not 

Thus  when  G^v  is  interpreted  as  characterizing  the  state 
of  matter  at  any  point,  there  is  found  to  be  a  quartet  of 
relations  satisfied  by  these  quantities.  The  form  of  these 
relations  corresponds  precisely  to  the  form  of  the  equations 
usually  taken  as  representing  the  laws  of  conservation  of 
energy  and  of  momentum. 

Thus  on  Einstein's  theory  these  laws  are  an  immediate 
consequence  of  the  invariance  of  the  action,  quite  apart  from 
the  principle  of  least  action.  l 

1  For  a  different  expression  of  the  intimate  relation  between  conservation 
and  relativity,  see  Eddington,  "  Space,  Time,  and  Gravitation,"  p.  139. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

THE  VERIFICATION  OF  EINSTEIN'S  EQUATIONS. 
90.  CONSEQUENCES  OF  THE  NEW  THEORY. 

WE   come   now  to   an    examination  of  the   two    results  of 
Einstein's  theory  which  have  been  so  strikingly  verified. 

Newton's  simple  law  of  the  inverse  square  for  gravitation 
together  with  his  scheme  of  dynamics  had  proved  to  account 
with  great  accuracy  for  all  the  planetary  and  lunar  motions 
with  all  the  irregularities  observed  in  those  motions,1  except 
for  one  or  two  outstanding  instances,  of  which  the  most  marked 
was  that  of  the  motion  of  the  perihelion  of  Mercury.  After 
allowance  for  all  known  causes  there  remained  an  unexplained 
progression  at  the  rate  of  40*2"  per  century. 

In  1915  Einstein  was  able  to  show  that  his  new  theory 
would  in  the  first  place  give  all  the  results  of  the  Newtonian 
theory  ;  but  further  he  found  that  a  correction  had  to  be  added 
which  in  the  case  in  question  amounts  to  a  progression  at  the 
rate  of  43"  per  century.  In  all  other  cases  the  correction  is 
negligible  and  leaves  the  agreement  between  theory  and 
observation  unspoiled. 

It  seems  sufficiently  surprising  that  generalities  such  as 
those  which  have  been  described  in  the  preceding  pages  should 
suggest  any  precise  numerical  result  at  all ;  but  that  they  should 
succeed  in  explaining  the  one  outstanding  discrepancy  within 
the  degree  of  accuracy  of  which  the  observations  are  capable 
is  sufficient  to  bring  the  theory  at  once  into  the  front  rank. 

The  second  verification  of  Einstein's  theory  was  in  respect 
of  its  prediction  that  light  rays  from  a  star  would  be  deflected 
if  they  pass  near  to  the  sun,  thus  producing  a  displacement 

1  The  classical  instance  is  the  prediction  of  the  existence  of  the  planet  Neptune 
from  a  consideration  of  the  perturbations  of  Uranus  by  Prof.  J.  Couch  Adams 
and  Leverrier. 

113  8 


114       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

which  should  be  measurable.  This  we  shall  consider  in  §  93. 
But  first  we  must  consider  in  detail  Einstein's  discussion  of 
the  field  of  gravitation  round  the  sun. 

91.  THE  FIELD  ROUND  THE  SUN  TREATED  AS  A  SINGLE 
GRAVITATING  PARTICLE. 

The  law  which  Einstein  proposed  for  the  gravitational  field 
in  free  space  is,  as  has  been  said, 

G^,,  =  o. 

This  is  a  set  of  ten  equations  connecting  the  quantities  g^v  and 
their  first  and  second  differential  coefficients. 

We  begin  to  ask  what  results  from  this  differential  equation 
if  the  field  is  associated  with  a  single  centre,  thinking  of  the 
sun  as  a  mere  particle  or  as  a  spherical  distribution  of  matter. 

Two  characteristics  may  at  once  be  laid  down  :  — 

(i)  The  field  is  constant,  that  is  does  not  vary  with  the  time. 

(ii)  The  sun's  gravitational  field  as  measured  by  an  observer 
on  the  sun,  will  be  symmetrical  round  its  centre. 

The  first  condition  requires  that  the  quantities  g^v  are  all 
independent  of  the  time. 

The  second  means  that  the  expression 


must  be  built  up  from  quantities  which  have  no  special  relation 
to  any  particular  direction  through  the  centre  of  the  sun. 

If  we  use  spherical  polar  co-ordinates  the  only  such 
quantity  in  addition  to  rt  the  distance  from  the  centre  and 
quantities  derived  from  it,  is  the  element  of  distance  between 
two  neighbouring  points  on  a  sphere  whose  centre  is  at  the 
centre  of  the  sun.  The  square  of  this  distance  is  known  to  be 

r\de*  +  sin20  aty2). 

Thus  the  two  conditions  limit  the  form  of  ds  to  that  given  by 
ds*  =  f(r)  dr*  +  $(r)  (d&*  +  sin20  d<f)  +  itfr)  dp. 

But  again,  in  view  of  the  general  Principle  of  Relativity, 
there  is  nothing  to  say  what  is  the  proper  way  to  measure  the 
distance  from  the  centre  of  the  sun  ;  so  that  we  will  say  quite 
arbitrarily  that  r  shall  be  so  measured  that  <£(r)  is  -  r2. 

Thus  ds*  is  now 

f(r)  dr*  -  r>(sin20  dtf  +  <#2)  +  ^(f)  dt\ 


THE  VERIFICATION  OF  EINSTEIN'S  EQUATIONS   115 

Or,          g-u  =  f(r\  g^  =  r*  sin20,  gzz  =  r\  g,,  =  f  (r), 
and  all  the  other  g^v  are  zero. 

It  remains  to  write  down  the  explicit  form  of  the  equations 

G^  =  o 

with  these  simplifications ;  when  this  is  done  it  is  found  that 
it  is  possible  to  find  without  ambiguity  the  form  of  the  functions 
f(r)  and  ty(r)  ;  in  fact  we  find  that 

W)  =  i  -  A/r    and  f(r)=     -  (i  -  A/r)-1 
where  A  is  a  constant  of  integration.     A  is  in  fact  the  con- 
stant which   shows  how  the  field  differs   from  a  field  of  no 
gravitation ;  for  if  A  were  zero  we  should  have 

d£  =    -  dr*  -  r2  (sin2  0d$*  +  dO*)  +  dt\ 
which  in  ordinary  Cartesian  co-ordinates  would  become 
-  dx*  -  dy*  -  dz>>  +  dt\ 

Thus,  except  for  the  evaluation  of  the  constant  A,  there  is 
a  unique  solution  of  the  gravitational  equations  subject  to  the 
conditions  of  permanence  and  symmetry.  This  solution  applies 
only  to  the  region  from  which  matter  is  absent.  It  would 
hold  in  the  region  outside  a  spherical  distribution  of  matter, 
but  not  within  the  matter  itself. 

The  constant  A  clearly  has  something  to  do  with  the  sun's 
power  to  produce  a  gravitational  field ;  and  we  shall  see  that 
it  corresponds  to  2ym,  where  m  is  the  mass  of  the  sun,  and  7 
the  constant  of  gravitation. 

92.  THE  MOTION  OF  A  PLANET  IN  THIS  FIELD. 

The  next  step  is  the  determination  of  the  motion  of  a 
particle  moving  freely  in  this  field ;  a  motion  which  is  deter- 
mined by  the  condition  that  ds  has  a  stationary  value.  The 

world-line  of  the  particle  is  a  shortest 
distance  in  the  four  -  dimensional 
map. 

We  take  any  arbitrary  world-line 

from  a  point  O  to  a  point  Q. 

fi>  FIG.  10. 

Let    s  =   \  ds,    P     being     any 

Jo 

point  on  this  line.     Let  an  adjacent  world-line  be  drawn,  the 
point  P'  corresponding  to  P  being  such  that  its  co-ordinates 


n6   RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

differ  from  those  of  P  by  8r,  80,  8$,  8tt  these  being  arbitrary 
functions  of  s,  subject  to  the  condition  that  they  vanish  at  the 
ends. 

Then  the  increment  in  [*ds  when  evaluated   along  this 

J  o 

varied  line  instead  of  the  original  line  is 


=  SJFtts 

where  F2  =  ifrff*  -  r*\ty  -  ^(sin2^'2  +  0'2),  accents  denoting 
differentiations  in  regard  to  s.  According  to  the  ordinary 
method  of  the  calculus  of  variations1  this  change  will  vanish 
to  the  first  order  in  8t,  8ry  80,  8<f>,  whatever  functions  of  s 
these  may  be  if 


c)F          <>F 

From  (iii)  and  (iv)  ^-77  and  ^  are  constant  along  the  re- 
quired path.  Also  by  the  definition  of  ds,  F  =  I  all  along 
this  path. 

Thus  we  obtain 

^sin2  0<f>'  =  h 

and  tyt  =  k 

h  and  k  being  constants. 

JThus 


Also  5/  =  5= 

ds       ds 

so  that,  integrating  by  parts, 


if  Sr  =  o  at  both  ends  of  the  path.     Similarly  for  the  other  co-ordinates.     Thus 

3F  ''/' 
ar  -i  ^Is 

- 

ds  W 


THE  VERIFICATION  OF  EINSTEIN'S  EQUATIONS    117 
Again  Fg  - 


or,  since  F  =  i  and  therefore  — -   =  o 

as 

d/DF\        d^ 
Also  F  —  =   -  r>sin0  costfcp 


.  '.  r'sintf  cos#$'2  =  r*B"  +  2rr'ff. 

Now,  at  any  specified  moment  the  particle  is  moving  in  a 
certain  plane  through  the  origin.  Let  the  axis  from  which  9 
is  measured  be  taken  normal  to  this  plane.  Then  at  this 

moment  0  =  -  or  cos#  =  o,  and  6'  =  o. 

2 

Hence  0"  is  zero,  and  6  remains  constantly  at  the  value 
7T/2.  Thus  the  orbit  remains  continually  in  this  plane. 

Instead  of  integrating  equation  (i)  we  use  F  =  I,  which 
must  be  consistent  with  it. 

Putting  6  =  7T/2  and  tyf  =  k  this  becomes 


Substituting  r^tf  =  h 

this  gives       rz  =  tf  -  I  +  A/r  -  #Y^  +  AA2/^- 

In  the  absence  of  the  last  term  this  equation  would  have 
been  exactly  the  Newtonian  equation,  except  that  here  r  is 
drjds  instead  of  dr\dt.  As  far  as  the  shape  of  the  orbit  goes, 
however,  this  makes  no  difference,  since  it  is  obtained  by 
eliminating  ds  or  dt  between  the  last  two  equations  to  give 
an  equation  connecting  r  and  <£>  only. 

Writing  A  =  27^,  h?  =  7^/,  and  k2  -  I  =  ym/a  the  last 
equation  becomes 


The  corresponding  Newtonian  equation  is 


where  S  is  the  mass  of  the  sun. 

Thus  we  are  able  to  identify  m  with  the  mass  of  the  sun. 


ii8       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

93.  NUMERICAL  CALCULATION  OF  THE  CORRECTION  TO 
NEWTONIAN  THEORY. 

The  value  of  ym  (taking  the  unit  of  length  to  be  i  kilo- 
metre, and  the  unit  of  time  — —  th  second,  so  that  the  velocity 

300000 

of  light  is  unity)  is  given  by  the  equation 

periodic  time  T  =  2ira  */  /J^m 
which  from  the  earth's  orbit  gives 

ym  =  a3/47T2T2  =  1-47. 

Thus,  in  the  orbit  of  Mercury,  since  r  is  of  order  io8  (kilo- 
metres) ym/r  is  of  the  order  io~8. 

Thus  ty  differs  from  I  by  the  order  io~8,  and  the  extra 
non-Newtonian  term  (in  our  equation)  is  of  the  same  order 
compared  with  the  other  terms  on  the  right-hand  side.  We 
may  say,  therefore,  that  to  that  order  of  approximation  the 
Newtonian  calculations  are  correct. 

We  proceed  to  find  the  effect  on  the  orbit  of  the  correcting 
term,  taking  account  only  of  the  first  order  in  ^r. 

The  equation  for  the  orbit  eliminating  s  or  t  is 


/       I  2         /       2ym/\ 

ym(  —  _  +  -  —  --  H '-^  } 

\      a  r       r*         r6   J 

or  putting  as  usual  u  =  i/r. 


'i)          -  I/a/  +  2ul  -  uz  - 
This  is  to  be  integrated  to  give  the  polar  equation  of  the  orbit. 
Here  we  consider  only  the  first  order  effect  on  the  apse 
lines  due  to  the  additional  term. 
Write  the  equation 


u          (a  -«)(«-  ft  (B  -  2ymu) 
where  a  and    /3   are   the    corrected    values   of  u   for   which 
dujd^  =  o,  that  is,  the  new  apsidal  distances.     B  is  given  by 

B  +  2ym  (a  +  /S)  =  I, 
and,  therefore,  is  only  slightly  different  from  I. 

During  the  motion  u  is  confined  between  a  and  {$. 


Thus  =  _  .„ 

du      N/\B(a  -  u)  (u  -  /3)     \  B 


a  -  u)(u-  ft     \  B 


THE  VERIFICATION  OF  EINSTEINS  EQUATIONS   119 

We  integrate  between  u  =  a  and  u  —  /3  to  obtain  the 
angle  c/>  between  the  apse  lines.  In  the  Newtonian  case  this 
anle  is  TT. 


pj         ,  _ 

e~ 


I      f  du  _         ym    r  _  u  du 

-  f  - 


TT 
= 


Putting  in  the  value  of  B  in  the  first  term,  and  neglecting 


=  TT  {i  +  ym(a  +  fi)}  +  —  ym(a 

2 


=  TT{I  + 

In  the  second  term,  which  is  small,  we  may  put  for  a  and  ft  their 
approximate  values  a-j(i  -  e)  and  a/(i  +  e)  of  the  Newtonian 

orbit  so  that 

(a  +  ft  =  2/*(l  -  *2)  =  2// 

Thus  <£  =  TT(I   +  37^//). 

The  angular  distance  from  apse  to  apse  exceeds  TT  therefore  by 
the  small  fraction  3ym/t  of  itself.  Thus  the  apse  line  moves 
forward  in  the  plane  of  the  orbit. 

For  Mercury  we  have 

/  =  5-55  x   io7  kilometres,  and  ym  =   1-47  kilometres, 
giving  37^//  =  7-95  x   io~8. 

The  time  of  one  revolution  of  Mercury  is  87-97  days. 

With  these  figures  the  rate  of  advance  of  the  apse  line 

works  out  as 

42-9"  per  century. 

The  outstanding  discrepancy  to  be  explained  was 
40  -2"  per  century. 

94.  THE  DEFLECTION  OF  LIGHT  IN  A  GRAVITATIONAL 

FIELD. 

The  law  which  has  been  suggested  for  the  propagation  of 
light  is  ds  =  o.  Taking  the  expression  obtained  above  this 
gives 


.  120      RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

Confining  our  attention  to  a  region  in  which  ym/r  is  small  we 
can  rewrite  this  equation 

(*)'  t  ,,,{«io,,(5)-  +  g)'}  ,  (,  .  as)' 

where  ^  =  r  -  //,  ;  so  that  if  we  plot  the  path  of  the  ray  of 
light  by  means  of  the  co-ordinates  rlt  6,  <f>,  we  find  that  its 

2ym 
velocity  is  I  -  - 

>-i 

In  this  picture  then  the  light  will  move  as  in  a  medium 

whose  refractive  index  u  is  (i  —  —  )     or  I  4  —  —  .    This  in- 

\          r,  J  r, 

creases  as  rt  diminishes  so  that  the  rays  will  be  concave  to  the 
origin. 

To  calculate  the  complete  deflection  of  a  ray  coming  from 
a  long  distance  and  travelling  to  a  great  distance,  we  proceed 
thus  :  if  /  is  the  perpendicular  from  the  centre  on  the  tangent 
the  ray  travels  so  that  pp  =  const. 

Thus  p(i  +  2^)  =  const. 


if  R  is  the  distance  of  nearest  approach  to  the  origin. 
This  gives    R(*   +  *X**/R)  =  j  +  ?7!? 


or  squaring 


This  can  be  identified  with  the  polar  equation  of  a  hyper- 
bola with  respect  to  the  focus,  viz. : — 

£2  2a 

?  ="  l  +    ^ 

by  putting  a  =  2ym 

and  £2  =  R2(i  -f 

or  b  =  R(i  + 

The  total  deflexion  of  the  ray  is  the  angle  between  the 

asymptotes,  viz  : —  _  1  a 

"2  tan     -y 
o 

which  to  the  first  order  is 

2tan~'ir  -  TT 


THE  VERIFICATION  OF  EINSTEIN'S  EQUATIONS    121 

On  drawing  the  corresponding  curve  with  r  as  the  radius 
vector  instead  of  rL  it  is  easily  seen  that  it  is  a  curve  with 
the  same  asymptotes,  so  that  the  deflexion  in  the  system  of 
co-ordinates  commonly  used  is  that  calculated. 

Taking  ym  =  I '47  kilometres  and  R  =  697,000  kilometres 
we  find  for  the  predicted  deflexion  of  a  ray  passing*  close  to 
the  sun's  surface  a  deflexion  of  1 74". 

This  figure  was  strikingly  verified  by  the  results  of  the 
photographs  of  stars  taken  in  the  region  round  the  sun  at  the 
total  eclipse  in  May  29,  1919.  An  account  of  the  details  is  to 
be  read  in  Prof.  Eddington's  "  Space,  Time,  and  Gravitation," 
Chapter  VII.  Some  further  discussion  of  the  interpretation 
of  the  result  will  be  found  in  the  next  chapter  (p.  121). 

95.   THE  SUGGESTED  SHIFT  OF  THE  SPECTRUM  BY 
GRAVITATION. 

The  prominence  given  to  the  interval  between  two  events 
as  an  invariant  quantity  with  a  physical  significance1  has  led 
to  a  much-discussed  suggestion  that  the  radiation  from  a  given 
atom  will  be  altered  in  period  if  the  atom  is  moved  into  a 
gravitational  field  of  different  intensity.  The  suggestion  arises 
thus.2  Let  ds  be  the  interval  measure  between  the  beginning 
and  end  of  a  single  vibration  of  a  radiating  atom,  as  measured 
in  a  given  set  of  co-ordinates,  at  a  certain  place  in  a  gravitational 
field.  By  variation  of  the  system  of  co-ordinates,  we  shall  see 
the  same  atom  in  an  apparently  different  field  of  gravitation, 
but  ds  will  remain  the  same.  Thus  it  is  suggested  that  ds  will 
be  a  permanent  quantity,  characteristic  of  the  vibration  of  this 
atom,  and  that  all  identical  atoms  will  give  the  same  vibration 
interval  ds  whatever  the  field  in  which  they  were  placed. 

If  this  were  so,  if  two  identical  atoms  were  at  rest  in  two 
different  places,  their  time-space  co-ordinates  being  respectively 
(x,  y,  z,  /),  (x\  /,  /,  /),  and  the  gravitational  tensor  being 
gp,  and^-'MJ,  for  the  two  atoms  respectively,  we  should  have 

ft**.'-***!1 

on  putting  &r  =  8x'  =  o,  etc.,  to  express  that  the  atoms  are  at 
rest  in  their  respective  fields.    Thus  the  corresponding  intervals 

1<SM** 

2  See  Eddington,  "  Space,  Time,  and  Gravitation,"  p.  128. 


122       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

of  time,  for  the  two  vibrations  of  the  respective  atoms,  are  in 
the  ratio  Jg^  :  *Jg\±.  Taking  the  values  of  g^  at  the  sun's 
surface,  and  at  the  distance  of  the  earth  from  the  sun  in  the 
field,  as  given  in  §  90,  this  ratio  differs  from  unity  by  about 
•000002,  which  would  correspond  to  a  shift  of  light  of  wave- 
length 4000  A  by  an  amount  -008  A  towards  the  red  end. 

Such  evidence  as  there  is,  is  apparently  against  the  ex- 
istence of  such  an  effect. 

But  it  is  important  to  note  that  the  argument  is  based  on 
a  hypothesis  which  has  not  been  used  in  connection  with  the 
two  phenomena  which  have  confirmed  Einstein's  theory ;  and 
that  is  that  nature  itself  will  provide  a  measure  of  the  interval 
between  two  events.  It  is  true  that  in  the  transformation 
from  one  co-ordinate  system  to  another  the  interval  between 
two  given  events  remains  fixed.  But  that  is  not  the  same  as 
saying  that,  in  any  one  co-ordinate  system,  we  can  say  of 
two  pairs  of  events,  defined  by  the  vibrations  of  two  widely 
separated  atoms,  that  the  intervals  are  the  same. 

Thus  the  failure  to  find  evidence  of  this  suggested  phe- 
nomena does  not  weaken  the  general  confirmation  of  Einstein's 
theory.  Not  only  so,  but  in  the  next  chapter  (§  105)  we 
shall  see  that  a  generalization  of  Einstein's  theory  is  made 
in  which  the  interval  between  two  events  is  an  indeterminate 
multiple  of  the  quantity  (g^d^x^,  so  that  it  becomes  im- 
possible to  say  that  this  is  a  universal  quantity  for  the  interval 
between  two  successive  vibrations  of  an  atom. 

96.  CONCLUSION. 

Beginning  then  with  an  attempt  to  satisfy  the  meta- 
physician, Einstein  has  succeeded  in  making  an  analysis  of 
physical  phenomena  which  is  in  most  marked  agreement  with 
observation.  It  is  therefore  an  analysis  which  has  to  be 
accepted  as  the  most  comprehensive  hitherto  achieved. 

Let  us  now  summarize  the  position,  especially,  in  regard 
to  the  concepts  of  space  and  time,  emphasizing  the  point  at 
which  the  new  theory  goes  further  than  the  special  principle 
of  1905. 

Like  that  principle  it  maintains  the  interrelation  of  the 


THE  VERIFICATION  OF  EINSTEIWS  EQUATIONS    123 

two  aspects  of  the  universe,  spatial  and  temporal ;  it  also 
retains  the  possibility  of  assigning  a  definite  numerical  value 
to  the  "interval"  between  two  events,  a  value  which  is  the 
same  in  all  systems  of  measurement 

One  point  which  the  new  theory  emphasizes  is  that  it  need 
not  be  possible  for  these  numerical  measures  of  the  intervals 
between  all  events  to  be  fitted  together  to  satisfy  the  require- 
ments of  Euclidean  geometry.1  Thus,  when  a  background  or 
set  of  co-ordinates  has  been  chosen,  and  a  time  scheme  has 
been  adopted  in  an  arbitrary  manner,  the  conceptual  space 
intervals  may  not  fit  together  like  ordinary  Euclidean  ele- 
ments of  length.  But,  we  must  remember  that  the  relation 
of  these  conceptual  space  intervals  to  measured  lengths  has 
yet  to  be  discussed  (see  pp.  126  fT.). 

Here  it  is  wise  to  warn  the  reader  against  possible  con- 
fusions in  language.  Some  would  say  that  the  last  sentence 
may  be  paraphrased  thus  "Space  is  non-Euclidean  " — implying 
that  for  them  Space  is  nothing  more  than  an  aspect  of  the 
metric  relations  between  material  phenomena — it  is  not  a 
background  of  co-ordinates,  it  is  not  the  aggregate  of  all  sets 
of  values  of  three  parameters. 

This  is  a  logical  attitude.  If  it  is  taken,  the  quantities 
g^v  are  characteristic  of  and  indeed  define  the  relation  of  the 
set  of  co-ordinates  chosen  to  the  complex  of  physical  changes.2 
But  it  is  most  important  to  keep  it  always  in  mind  that 
the  word  '  space '  is  now  only  a  convenient  term  to  cover  the 
metric  relations  of  the  physical  world. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  are  those  who  would  use  the  word 

1  This  is  not  even  true  in  the  case  of  the  special  Principle  of  Relativity ;  for 
there  the  line  element  is  given  by 

d&  =  -  dxz  -  dy*  -  dz*  +  dt* 

and  if  x,  y,  z,  t  are  all  real  quantities  the  related  geometry  is  not  Euclidean. 
Only  when  t  =  T  >J(  -  i),  r  being  real,  do  we  arrive  at  a  quasi-Euclidean  geometry. 
In  the  actual  universe  it  is  generally  possible  to  join  two  points  by  a  line  of  zero 
length,  a  distinctly  non-Euclidean  property. 

2  This  is  presumably  what  Prof.  Eddington  means  when  he  says  ("  Report," 
p.  22)  that  "  the  values  of  the  ^'s  express  the  metrical  properties  of  the  space 
used".      Here  clearly  "space"  means  co-cordinate  system.     Later,  however, 
we  read,  "  When  he  speaks  of  space,  he  means  the  space  revealed  by  measure- 
ment, whatever  its  geometry" — ("  Space,  Time,  and  Gravitation"). 


124       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

t  space '  in  such  a  sense  that  by  itself  it  has  no  metric  properties. 
It  cannot  be  said  to  be  either  Euclidean  or  non-Euclidean. 
Given  the  complex  of  phenomena  we  are  at  liberty  to  choose  out 
any  arbitrarily  moving  point  and  say  that  its  course  is  a  straight 
line  defined  uniformly — or  we  may  take  any  curve  whatever  in 
the  four-dimensional  picture  and  call  it  straight  We  may  take 
any  fourfold  meshwork  as  defining  a  set  of  parameters.  These 
may  be  taken  as  ordinary  Cartesian  co-ordinates — the  picture 
may  be  strained,  so  to  speak,  until  the  parametric  surfaces  are 
flat.  There  is  a  Euclidean  geometry  in  this  fourfold  back- 
ground, but  that  geometry  does  not  correspond  with  the 
geometry  of  measured  motion.  The  Euclidean  element  of 
length  is  not  the  measured  element  of  length.  Over  and 
above  the  frame  of  reference  we  require  to  know  the  values  of 
the  coefficients  g  at  each  point.  From  this  point  of  view,  to 
the  individual  observer  who  has  chosen  his  frame  of  reference 
— once  for  all — the  coefficients  g  appear  as  properties  of  the 
physical  world  relative  to  his  frame  of  reference.  Here  we 
are  nearer  to  the  Newtonian  position ;  and  provided  we  re- 
cognize the  equal  validity,  that  is,  the  complete  relativity,  of 
all  space-time  partitions  of  the  physical  world,  there  is  nothing 
to  hinder. 

But  the  former  position  is  in  one  respect  to  be  preferred. 
For  it  recognizes  the  physical  reality  as  one,  and  the  mental 
pictures  of  it  as  many,  subjective  and  relative.  The  latter 
position  requires  one  to  think  of  quantities  such  as  g^v  as 
representing  metrical  properties  of  the  physical  world,  although 
their  values  only  partially  depend  upon  physical  phenomena, 
and  indeed  are  largely  arbitrary. 

The  theory  recognizes  no  physical  significance  in  any 
equations  which  are  dependent  for  their  validity  on  the  choice 
of  a  system  of  measurement.  In  that  sense  it  is  a  theory  of 
the  "  absolute  "  physical  world,  the  world  absolved  from  indi- 
vidual views  of  it.  The  relativity  is  characteristic  of  the  view. 


CHAPTER   IX. 

FURTHER   CRITICISM   AND    GENERALIZATION. 
WEYL'S  THEORY  OF  ELECTRICITY, 

(The  reader  will  have  realized  that  we  are  dealing  now  with  an  essentially 
mathematical  theory,  and  it  cannot  be  hoped  that  this  chapter  will  give  any 
other  impression.  The  main  conclusions  have  been  italicized.  I  have  to 
thank  Prof.  H.  F.  Baker  for  valuable  criticism  of  this  chapter.) 

97..  RECAPITULATION. 

IN  the  preceding  chapter  the  order  of  the  argument  has  been 
mainly  historical ;  the  purpose  has  been  to  give  a  straight- 
forward account  of  Einstein's  method  and  results. 

Before  concluding,  it  is  worth  while  however  to  re- 
capitulate and  to  see  the  general  lines  upon  which  a  radical 
reconstruction  of  physical  theory  must  proceed.  We  shall  see 
that  even  Einstein's  generalized  relativity  is  not  the  last 
word,  and  an  attempt  will  be  made  to  indicate  the  lines  along 
which  Weyl  has  shown  that  it  is  possible  by  a  further  step  to 
give  to  electricity  as  natural  a  place  as  that  accorded  to 
gravitation  in  Einstein's  theory.  Einstein  himself  has  shown 
that  it  is  possible  to  generalize  the  fundamental  equations  of 
electrical  theory  so  that  they  have  an  invariant  form,  and  are 
therefore  consistent  with  the  Principle  of  Relativity  in  the 
sense  in  which  he  uses  the  term.  But  in  his  treatment  the 
connection  between  the  gravitational  field  and  the  geometry 
of  the  measure  system  is  so  intimate,  while  that  between  the 
electrical  field  and  the  measure  system  is  so  remote,  that  the 
fundamental  place  accorded  to  electricity  in  modern  thought 
seems  to  be  denied.  In  Weyl's  theory  it  is  completely 
restored,  and  gravitation  and  electricity  rank  together  as  two 
fundamental  properties  of  matter,  forming  together  the  basis 
of  all  natural  systems  of  measurement. 

98.  RECONSTRUCTION. 

The  universe  of  phenomena  is  now  conceived  to  be  laid  out 
as  a  four-dimensional  whole.  Corresponding  to  our  ordinary 

125 


126       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

conception  of  a  point  of  space  at  a  definite  instant  of  time, 
we  have  in  this  four-dimensional  whole  a  marked  point  or 
position,  which  to  save  confusion  it  is  better  to  call  an  event. 
The  history  of  a  particle  is  recorded  as  a  continuous  one- 
dimensional  sequence  of  such  events,  or  a  curve. 

For  the  purpose  of  distinguishing  between  events  we 
introduce  a  set  of  four  variable  quantities  (x^  x^  x^  #4) ;  to 
each  event  corresponds  a  definite  set  of  values  of  these.  Two 
events  are  neighbouring  events  if  the  values  of  these  co- 
ordinates differ  only  by  small  quantities. 

Our  object  now  is  to  search  out  definite  relations  between 
these  events,  to  describe  by  comprehensive  formulae  the 
nature  of  the  sequences  which  we  are  able  to  observe.  This 
is  the  work  of  the  mathematician,  who  must  accordingly 
develop  his  machinery. 

99.  THE  NATURE  OF  OBSERVATIONS  AND  OF 
MEASUREMENT. 

It  has  several  times  been  remarked  above  that  the  only 
precise  observations  are  those  of  coincidences.1  The  physicist 
constantly  seeks  to  eliminate  from  his  experiments  the  ap- 
plication of  personal  human  judgment  to  the  estimation  of 
intervals  of  time  or  space.  He  makes  the  photographic  plate, 
the  micrometer  screw,  the  galvanometer  scale  do  the  work 
for  him.  Thus  the  work  of  observation  is  reduced  to  the 
recording  of  the  fact  that  a  certain  event  in  one  chain  of  events 
coincides  with  a  certain  other  event  in  another  chain ;  or,  in 
other  words,  of  the  fact  that  a  certain  event  is  common  to  two 
particular  world  lines.  The  work  of  theory  consists  in  dis- 
covering the  relations  that  hold  between  such  observations. 

But,  it  may  be  asked,  granted  that  all  operations  of 
measurement  may  be  reduced  to  observations  of  coincidences 
between  marks  on  scales  and  on  the  bodies  under  measure- 
ment, between  spider  lines  and  optical  images,  and  so  on, 
what  is  the  relation  of  the  intervals  of  length  and  time  as 
measured  to  the  co-ordinate  numbers  which  have  been 
introduced  merely  for  the  purpose  of  distinguishing  one 

1  See  §§  24,  43,  72. 


FURTHER  GENERALIZATION  (WEYL'S  THEORY]     127 

event  from  another?  What  meaning  in  fact  is  left  for  such 
a  term  as  "  a  measured  interval  of  length  ". 

If  we  analyze  elementary  methods  of  measuring  distance, 
we  come  back  to  the  calibration  of  a  scale.  For  the  purpose 
of  doing  this,  we  have  to  take  a  certain  body,  which  is  con- 
ceived to  be  permanent  in  configuration  (though  what  this  really 
means  it  is  extremely  difficult  to  say);  we  bring  a  certain 
segment  of  this  body  between  two  marks  into  coincidence 
with  successive  segments  of  the  scale,  and  mark  off  the  lengths 
with  which  it  coincides  each  time.  These  lengths  are  called 
equal  because  they  coincide  in  turn  with  the  same  segment 
of  the  trial  body.  The  scale  itself  is  conceived  also  to  be  per- 
manent in  configuration.  Thus  a  measuring  rod  is  prepared. 

Thus  practical  measures  of  length  rest  on  the  conception 
of  an  ideal  "  rigid"  scale.  But  all  that  can  be  said  in  defini- 
tion of  the  term  "  rigidity "  is,  that  experiment  shows  that 
we  can  obtain  bodies  which  give  approximately  consistent 
measurements.  Two  segments  which  have  once  coincided 
may  be  expected  to  coincide  again  if  brought  together.  There 
is  no  absolute  standard  by  which  it  may  be  said  of  any  one 
body  that  it  always  has  and  will  have  the  same  configuration. 
We  can  hardly  say  more  than  this,  that  rigidity  is  the  common 
property  of  those  bodies  whose  mutual  measurements  are 
always  and  everywhere  consistent,  but  that  such  bodies  do 
not,  in  fact,  exist. 

100.  FURTHER  DISCUSSION  OF  THE  INTERPRETATION  OF 
THE  ECLIPSE  OBSERVATIONS. 

Now,  to  make  discussion  concrete,  let  us  consider  in  detail 
the  interpretation  of  the  actual  observations  made  by  the 
Eclipse  Expedition.  These  have  been  said  to  confirm 
Einstein's  theory.  In  what  sense  is  this  the  case  ?  What  are 
the  actual  steps  taken,  first  in  the  application  of  the  theory  in 
this  concrete  instance ;  second,  in  the  practical  measurements  ? 

In  §  91,  it  was  said  that  of  all  conceivable  co-ordinate 
systems,  only  one  is  consistent  with  the  two  hypotheses : — 

(i)  That  the  gravitational  field  does  not  vary  with  the 
time; 


128       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

(ii)  That  the  field  is  symmetrical  round  the  sun  as  centre 
(By  symmetry  it  was  implied,  that  if  the  space  co- 
ordinates are  treated  as  Euclidean  the  gravitational 
tensor  depends  only  on  the  distance  from  the  centre.) 

On  the  basis  of  this  set  of  co-ordinates  a  picture  of  the 
universe  was  set  up.  The  paths  of  the  rays  of  light  were 
marked  out  in  this  picture  on  the  hypothesis  that  the  equation 
ds  =  o  represented  the  law  of  propagation.  It  was  then  found 
that  these  rays  were  curved  (in  the  picture)  to  a  greater  or  less 
degree  according  to  the  distance  at  which  they  passed  the  sun. 

The  crucial  test  is  :  Can  this  curvature  be  detected  ?  Let 
it  be  emphasized  that  the  curvature  is  relative  to  a  background 
of  conceptual  co-ordinates.  The  theory  proceeds  to  map  out 
the  photographic  plate,  associating  with  each  point  of  it  values 
of  the  Einstein  co-ordinates.  The  displacements  of  the  images 
predicted  by  the  theory  are  stated  in  terms  of  changes  in  the 
theoretical  co-ordinates  of  the  images.  In  the  actual  observa- 
tions, photographs  were  taken  of  a  certain  group  of  stars, 
and  the  relative  positions  of  the  images  on  the  plate  were 
compared  with  the  positions  of  the  images  of  the  same  stars 
photographed  at  a  time  when  the  rays  did  not  pass  near 
the  sun.  Measurements  experimentally  taken  by  means  of 
a  micrometer  measuring-machine  showed  certain  changes 
in  the  relative  positions  as  plotted  in  terms  of  readings  on  the 
micrometer.  Theory t  on  the  other  hand,  predicts  that  there 
will  be  changes  in  the  relative  positions  as  plotted  in  terms  of 
the  conceptual  scale  of  co-ordinates. 

Until  we  have  assured  ourselves  of  the  relation  between 
the  micrometer  measurements  and  the  numbers,  which  for  con- 
venience we  may  call  Einstein's  co-ordinates,  we  cannot  know 
what  relation  to  expect  between  the  changes  in  the  positions 
of  the  images  in  the  co-ordinate  system  and  the  measured 
displacements. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  measurements  of  the  plates  showed 
a  surprising  agreement  with  the  predicted  displacements  in  the 
conceptual  picture.  What  then  may  we  conclude  ? 

We  are  tempted  to  say  at  once — the  theory  is  correct. 
But  there  is  more  than  this.  It  is  just  conceivable  that  the 


FURTHER  GENERALIZATION  (WEYLS  THEORY}     129 

theory  might  be  wrong,  but  that  a  further  discrepancy  between 
conceptual  co-ordinates  and  measured  positions  might  bring 
the  prediction  again  into  agreement  with  observation.  This 
seems  unlikely  in  a  high  degree — so  that  our  conclusion  is 
that  there  is  a  considerable  probability 

(i)  That  Einstein's  conceptual  picture  of  the  phenomena 

is  a  consistent  one,  and 

(ii)  That  his  conceptual  measures  of  distance  by  co-ordinate 
numbers  are  in  accord  with  the  experimental 
measures.  To  this  point  we  will  return  shortly. 

101.  RESUME  OF  NEWTONIAN  CONCEPTIONS. 

Let  us  before  going  further  see  how  Newton's  stock  of 
conceptions  stands  in  relation  to  what  has  just  been  said. 

Newton  postulates  an  absolute  time  and  space ;  but  we 
must  do  him  justice  and  admit  that,  his  own  definitions  not- 
withstanding, he  does  not  anywhere  assume  the  existence  of 
an  absolute  standard  apart  from  the  phenomena  themselves. 
His  space  and  time  are  a  conceptual  scheme  employed  for  the 
purpose  of  describing  the  relations  between  phenomena. 

On  this  conceptual  background  of  time  and  space  co- 
ordinates he  elaborates  his  picture  of  the  motions  of  bodies ; 
he  is  thus  able  to  predict  which  point  of  his  conceptual 
space  corresponds  to  a  planet  at  any  moment  of  his  conceptual 
time;  he  can  express  the  space-co-ordinate  numbers  of  the 
planet  in  terms  of  the  time  co-ordinate  number.  When  this 
is  done  it  is  found  that,  except  in  the  long  standing  discrepancy 
in  the  motion  of  the  perihelion  of  Mercury,  there  is  precise 
agreement,  within  the  limits  of  accuracy  to  which  we  can 
rely  upon  our  measurements,  between  the  positions  as  pre- 
dicted by  the  conceptual  co-ordinate  numbers  and  the  co- 
ordinate numbers  actually  obtained  by  measurement.  That  is, 
astronomical  observations  confirm  the  suggestion  that  the 
partitioning  of  space  by  means  of  measurements  with  a  so- 
called  rigid  body  agrees  with  the  partitioning  by  means  of 
Newton  s  conceptual  co-ordinates.  This  means  further  that 
it  is  confirmed,  indirectly  it  is  true,  but  none  the  less  distinctly, 

9 


130       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

that  the  "  rigid  bodies "  involved,  scales  and  micrometer 
screws,  occupy  exactly  the  same  volume  and  shape  as  described 
by  the  conceptual  co-ordinates,  no  matter  where  they  may 
be  placed,  whether  they  are  moving  or  at  rest. 

Thus  the  success  of  Newton's  theory,  as  far  as  it  goes, 
confirms  the  belief  that  there  is  a  conceptual  space-time 
system  of  measurement  in  which — 

(i)  Newton's  laws  of  motion  hold  ; 

(ii)  Newton's  law  of  gravitation  holds ;  and 
(iii)  The  conception  of  a  rigid  body  is  tenable. 
In  other  words,  these  three  hypotheses  are  mutually  consistent 
in  the  light  of  experiment.  In  itself  this  conclusion  may  seem 
very  meagre,  and  merely  a  repetition  of  familiar  truths  in  a 
different  form  ;  but  by  stating  them  in  this  way  we  avoid 
Newton's  unphilosophic  postulation  at  the  outset  of  a  self- 
existent  absolute  space  and  time ;  we  grant  the  a  priori 
relativity  of  all  space  and  time  measures ;  but  at  the  same 
time  we  recognize  that  the  relations  existent  within  the  realm 
of  phenomena  determine  what  conceptual  space-time  system 
we  may  most  conveniently  adopt. 

102.  THE  RIGID  BODY:  THE  PHOTOGRAPHIC  PLATE. 

In  the  analysis  that  has  now  been  made  the  co-ordinate 
system  appears  merely  as  a  mathematical  machinery  for  com- 
paring certain  perceived  relations  between  phenomena. 

Among  these  phenomena  are  the  motions  of  the  planets 
and  the  propagation  of  light.  But  we  must  now  include  as  a 
phenomenon  of  perception  the  existence  of  the  approximately 
rigid  body.  That  is,  there  is  no  longer  supposed  to  be  any 
such  thing  as  an  ideal  or  conceptual  rigid  body.  It  is  simply 
a  matter  of  experience  that  in  a  certain  co-ordinate  system, 
chosen  for  the  simplicity  which  the  equations  of  motion  take 
relative  to  it,  there  is  a  large  class  of  actual  bodies  which 
occupy  approximately  the  same  space  in  the  picture  wher- 
ever they  may  be  placed,  and  at  all  time.  The  "  ideal  rigid 
body"  would  be  nothing  more  than  a  body  which  did  this 
exactly ;  but  to  speak  of  such  a  concept  is  simply  to  give  a 
name  borrowed  from  concrete  experience  to  a  purely  numerical 


FURTHER  GENERALIZATION  (WEYUS  THEORY]     131 

conception.  There  is  no  such  thing,  therefore,  as  "  measure- 
ment by  the  ideal  rigid  body  ".  The  phrase  means  nothing  more 
than  the  comparison  of  certain  perceived  phenomena  through 
the  mediation  of  a  conceptual  co-ordinate  system.  But  the 
rigid  body  of  experience  is  essentially  a  complicated  dynamical 
system.  Its  property  of  permanence  is  of  the  same  kind  as  the 
permanence  of  the  solar  system  as  a  whole. 

Thus  we  have  to  recognize  that  the  measuring  of  the  eclipse 
photographs  by  the  micrometer  might  quite  possibly  give  re- 
sults differing  from  the  measures  by  means  of  the  co-ordinate 
numbers  at  which  theory  arrives. 

But  just  as  the  system  of  co-ordinates  which  is  evolved  by 
Einstein  as  most  appropriate  to  the  gravitational  field  round  the 
sun  differs  only  slightly  from  that  obtained  by  Newton  in  its 
relations  to  the  planetary  motions,  so  it  differs  only  slightly  in 
its  relation  to  the  dynamical  system  which  constitutes  the 
photographic  plate.  It  is  in  fact  a  matter  for  observation  or 
experimental  verification  that  a  rigid  body,  in  the  ordinary 
sense,  a  plate  of  glass,  for  instance,  or  the  micrometer  screw 
does  occupy  approximately  a  constant  region  as  marked  out 
by  Einstein's  co-ordinates,  so  that  the  calibration  of  the  plate 
by  the  screw  agrees  very  approximately  with  that  by  means 
of  the  co-ordinates. 

Thus  the  agreement  of  the  theoretical  displacement  ob- 
tained by  Einstein  with  the  actual  measurements  is  as  much  a 
confirmation  of  this  property  of  the  rigid  body  as  it  is  a  veri- 
fication of  Einstein's  theory  of  the  nature  of  gravitation.  It  is 
a  confirmation  of  the  mutual  consistency  of  all  the  hypotheses, 
but  not  strictly  a  demonstration  of  any  one  of  them. 

103.  THE  MATHEMATICAL  MACHINERY  FOR  DESCRIBING 
THE  ORDER  OF  A  CHAIN  OF  EVENTS. 

The  method  of  the  mathematician  is  first  to  devise  a  means 
of  describing  in  terms  of  numbers  the  order  or  arrangement 
of  a  one-dimensional  series  of  events.  If  it  were  a  discrete 
series,  the  work  would  be  merely  one  of  enumeration.  But 
all  possible  events  form  for  us  a  continuum,  and  this  requires 
that  to  all  the  events  ranged  as  they  are  in  order  along  a 

9* 


132       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

world  line  we  shall  make  correspond  the  values  of  a  con- 
tinuously increasing  number.  This  is  done  by  assigning  a 
measure  to  the  separation  of  two  adjacent  events.  In  this 
connection  an  infinitesimal  calculus  is  introduced. 

Riemann  in  his  discussion  of  the  bases  of  geometry  at 
once  introduces  as  the 'measure  of  separation  of  two  neigh- 
bouring events  the  quadratic  form  ds1  =  g^dx^dx^  dx^  being 
the  excess  of  the  co-ordinates  of  an  event  P'  over  those  of  a 
neighbouring  event  P.  This  is  the  simplest  expression  that 
can  be  devised  which  will  vanish  if  P'  coincides  with  P,  and 
which  may  be  positive  for  all  values  of  the  ratios  of  dx^ :  dxv, 
that  is  for  all  events  P'  in  the  neighbourhood  of  P.  Here  g^v 
are  quite  arbitrary.  The  linear  form  f^dx^  is  simpler,  but  is 
excluded  inasmuch  as  the  changing  of  sign  dx^  would  change 
the  sign  of  the  whole  expression,  and  therefore  lead  to  a 
quantity  which  would  express  the  separation  of  two  events  in 
some  cases  as  negative. 

104.  GENERALIZATION. 

But  Riemann's  method  is  not  the  most  general  that  can 
be  adopted  for  the  purpose  we  have  in  view,  namely,  the 
description  of  the  order  of  events  along  any  arbitrary  world 

line.     It  is  true  that  taking  any  world  line  through  a  point  P, 

(Q 
ds  as  the  separation  of 

Q  from  P;  since  ds  is  always  positive,  s  will  increase  continuously 
as  Q  moves  along  the  world-line  without  retracing  its  steps, 
so  that  Riemann's  method  is  adequate.  But  suppose,  that  .hav- 
ing laid  down  such  a  set  of  quantities  g^  and  thus  associated 
a  value  of  ds  with  each  interval,  we  arbitrarily  and  non- 
uniformly  stretch  our  measure  of  the  separation  of  the  events 
along  a  certain  curve.  Suppose  that,  in  mathematical  lan- 
guage, fixing  attention  on  a  certain  defined  world-line  we  write 

da  =  <j>ds 

where  (f>  is  an  arbitrary  positive  multiplier  varying  in  any 
manner  from  point  to  point  along  the  world-line.  Then  Ida 
varies  always  in  the  same  sense  as  Ids ;  and  therefore  for  the 
single  purpose  of  describing  the  order  of  events  on  this  world- 
line  I  dcr  is  as  adequate  as  ids. 


FURTHER  GENERALIZATION  (WEYVS  THEORY}     133 

Also  as  long  as  we  are  thinking  only  of  one  particular 
world-line  we  are  concerned  only  with  the  values  of  </>  along 
that  line.  We  are  not  bound  in  considering  two  world-lines 
which  intersect  one  another  to  limit  ourselves  to  the  same 
quantity  <£  at  the  common  event.  For  defmiteness  all  that  is 
necessary  is  that  each  world-line  shall  itself  determine  what 
value  of  (/>  is  to  be  taken  at  each  point  of  itself. 

Now  just  as  Riemann  found  a  sufficient  means  of  prescrib- 
ing a  measure  for  the  interval  between  adjacent  events  by 
means  of  the  quantities  g^v  and  the  quadratic  form,  we  are 
able  to  devise  a  sufficient  means  for  our  new  purpose  by  lay- 
ing down  the  rate  at  which  (/>  varies  in  any  direction  starting 
from  an  arbitrary  event.  This  is  done  by  putting 

S(log<£)  =  2<^^(/4=  1,2,  3,4) 
where  ^  is  a  set  of  four  arbitrary  functions. 

If  further  we  allow  that  when  the  co-ordinates  are  changed 
(^  is  also  to  be  so  changed  that  the  linear  form  $^dx^  remains 
invariant,  then  the  values  of  </>  to  which  it  leads  along  any 
world-line  are  not  affected  by  any  change  of  co-ordinates. 

105.  EINSTEIN'S  INTERVAL  BETWEEN  Two  EVENTS  NO 
LONGER  A  DEFINITE  QUANTITY. 

Suppose  then  that  this  linear  form  is  laid  down  in  an 
arbitrary  manner.  In  general,  starting  from  a  given  value  <f>0 
at  P,  the  value  of  </>  at  another  point  Q  will  depend  upon  the 

path  by  which  Q  is  reached.  This  will  be  so  unless  Uy£rM 
taken  round  any  closed  curve  is  zero1  —  that  is  unless 
~^  =  ~  at  all  points.  But  the  purpose  we  have  in  view 

O  Kv          U^fj. 

does  not  need  that  this  should  be  so,  inasmuch  as  we  are 
only  concerned  with  the  order  of  points  along  one  world-line 
at  a  time. 

The  gradients  <£M  rank  with  the  coefficients  g^v.  We  may 
lay  down  their  values  arbitrarily  for  the  whole  of  the  field. 


/Q  TQ 

QiJidXfj..     If  I   <f>fj.dXfj.  has  the  same  value  for  two  paths 

say  PAQ,  and  PBQ;  then  I  fadx^  for  the  path  PAQBP  is  zero;  and  vice  versa. 


134       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

But  when  this  is  done,  the  multiplier  0  is  not  as  a  rule  de- 
fined except  as  to  its  variation  along  any  given  world-line. 
Thus  the  interval  dcr  =  <$)ds  is  not  a  unique  and  defined  quantity . 
Thus  with  this  generalization  the  argument  for  a  shift  in  the 
spectral  lines  due  to  a  gravitational  field  does  not  hold 
(see  §  95). 

1 06.  REDUNDANCE  IN  THE  ARBITRARINESS  OF  THE 
MODE  OF  ORDERING. 

There  is  a  certain  amount  of  overlapping  however  in  the 
arbitrariness  of  the  g^  field  and  the  <£  field. 

We  do  not  alter  the  value  of  the  separation  do-  for  every 
element  of  any  given  curve  if  we  multiply  the  value  of  (j>  by 
an  arbitrary  function  of  position  -\/r,  and  at  the  same  time 
divide  each  of  the  quantities  g^  by  i|r2. 

Thus  the  ordering  of  events  by  this  method  is  one  in 
which  the  measure  relations  remain  unaltered  if  we  put 


Further  we  do  not  change  the  value  of  each  element  of  separa- 
tion if  we  replace  the  co-ordinates  x^  by  any  other  set  of  co- 
ordinates x^  provided  that  at  the  same  time  the  coefficients 
fa  and  g^v  are  replaced  by  suitable  other  quantities  $^  and  g^ 
such  that  the  two  differential  forms  fa  dx^  and  g^v  dx^  dx^, 
are  both  invariant.  In  the  language  of  the  ordinary  tensor 
theory  employed  by  Einstein,  this  means  that  fa  is  to  be  a 
covariant  vector  and  g^v  the  ordinary  covariant  tensor  of  second 
rank. 

We  may  say  that  <p^  and  g^  define  a  measure -system,  but 
a  given  measure-system  leaves  <£M  and g^  largely  arbitrary. 

1  Putting  </>'  =  $<(>, 

we  have 


=-~r     (log 


FURTHER  GENERALIZATION  (WEYUS  THEORY]     135 

107.  NATURE  DOES  NOT  MAKE  QUANTITATIVE 

EVALUATIONS. 

Thus  much  for  the  mere  machinery  of  recording  the  order 
of  events.  Next  as  to  the  nature  of  the  relations  which  de- 
scribe natural  phenomena. 

The  observed  relations,  as  has  been  said,  are  merely  of 
coincidence.  But  they  are  always  mathematically  recorded 
by  means  of  numerical  quantities  introduced  for  the  purpose. 
Nature  itself  cannot  recognize  or  prescribe  any  particular  method 
of  quantitative  evaluation  ;  that  is  only  part  of  our  intellectual 
machinery. 

If,  therefore,  we  write  down  any  mathematical  equation 
which  expresses  observed  relations  it  must  be  of  such  a  nature 
that  its  validity  is  independent  of  the  arbitrary  choices  of  the 
quantities  used  for  the  purpose  of  mathematical  expression. 

It  should  be  true,  therefore,  that  any  order  relations  will 
be  maintained  true  if  we  make  any  arbitrary  change  in  the 
method  by  which  we  assign  to  any  pair  of  events  a  numerical 
measure  of  the  interval  between  them. 

1 08.  INTRINSIC  QUALITIES  OF  A  MEASURE-SYSTEM. 
DIRECT   ROUTES.     INVARIANTS. 

If  we  adopt  an  arbitrary  measure-system,  that  is,  if  we 
assign  certain  numerical  magnitudes  to  the  intervals  of  each 
world-line,  as  in  §§  104-6  we  have  a  complete  relativity  of  co- 
ordinates within  such  a  measure-system,  as  well  as  an  arbi- 
trariness in  what  we  may  call  the  guage-system  <^. 

But  each  measure-system  has  intrinsic  characteristics  indepen- 
dent of  the  choice  of  co-ordinate-system  or  gauge-system.  As  an 
illustration  of  this,  suppose  that  we  have  assigned  an  arbitrary 
field  of  values  to  gj  and  ^M,  and  adopted  an  arbitrary  system 
of  co-ordinates  for  the  mapping  out  of  our  four-dimensional 
world.  Let  A,  B  be  any  two  events,  and  </>0  the  value  of  <£  at 

x\.     Then  for  any  given  path  between  A  and  B,  I  dcr  is  defined. 
It    follows    that    the   direct  routes   from   event  to  event  are 


136       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 
thereby  laid  down,  a  direct   route   being  defined  as  one  for 

which  \d(j  has  a  stationary  value.  Thus  each  measure-  system 
has  its  characteristic  system  of  direct  routes  or  geodesies,  the 
determination  of  which  depends  only  upon  the  two  invariants 
fa  dXfi  and  g^  dx^  dxv. 

Each  measure-system  may  also  have  associated  with  it 
certain  quantities  whose  values  are  unaltered  under  co-ordinate 
changes  and  guage-changes  which  leave  any  given  interval 
unaltered.  For  instance  the  integral 


where  /«  -         -        ,  and  /*  -  ^  ^  /„ 

taken  over  any  given  region  in  the  four-dimensional  world  is 
such  an  invariant.  Another  quantity  so  invariant  is  I  </>M  dx^ 
taken  round  any  closed  curve  ;  for,  on  the  understanding  that 
^  is  a  covariant  vector  <j>^  dx^  is  invariant  for  co-ordinate 
changes,  and  for  a  change  of  guage  as  above  (§  106),  we  have 


f  </,, 


since  the  total  increment  in  log  i/r  is  zero  on   describing  a 
closed  circuit. 

109.  PHYSICAL  LAWS  AND  SPECIAL  MEASURE-SYSTEMS 

Einstein's  theory  and  its  extension  at  the  hands  of  Weyl 
seek  now  to  establish  a  correspondence  between  these  intrinsic 
properties  of  the  measure-system  and  the  universe  of  material 
phenomena. 

For  instance,  part  of  Einstein's  hypothesis  for  the  explan- 
ation of  planetary  motion  is  that  the  free  motion  of  a  particle 
is  a  direct  route  or  geodesic  of  the  measure-system.  We  may  put 
this  hypothesis  in  the  form  of  a  question  —  can  we,  out  of  all 
possible  measure-systems,  select  one  in  which  the  direct  routes  are 
the  actual  paths  of  free  particles  ? 

Further,  Einstein  seeks  to  set  up  a  correspondence  between 


FURTHER  GENERALIZATION  (WE YDS  THEORY}     137 

the  presence  of  matter,  the  gravitational  influence  of  matter 
and  the  intrinsic  properties  of  the  measure-system  ;  with  this 
in  view  he  selects  the  tensor,  G^v,  propounding  the  hypothesis 
that  the  vanishing  of  this  is  to  correspond  with  the  absence 
of  matter. 

Thus  we  have  another  question  ;  is  it  possible  to  select  from 
all  possible  measure-systems  one  which  is  such  that  the  tensor,  G^v, 
vanishes  at  all  regions  in  the  four-dimensional  world  which  are 
not  occupied  by  matter  ? 

To  both  of  these  questions  the  provisional  answer  is  "  yes  "  ; 
and  the  experiments  have  confirmed  the  answer  by  showing 
that  its  consequences  in  the  region,  open  to  test,  are  actually 
observed.  Thus  the  law  of  gravitation  becomes  the  condition 
which  singles  out  a  measure-system.  We  have  seen  in  the  last 
chapter  how  the  law  G^u  =  o,  with  the  assumption  of  symmetry 
round  a  centre,  did  actually  lead  to  a  definite  measure-system 
in  which  the  path  of  Mercury  is  verified  in  practice  to  be  a 
geodesic. 

no.  NATURAL  MEASURE-SYSTEMS. 

What  does  this  mean  for  other  measure-systems  in 
which  the  path  of  Mercury  is  not  a  direct  route?  Mathe- 
matically they  are  equally  capable  of  describing  the  relative 
positions  and  orders  of  the  four-dimensional  world.  But  in 
the  picture  which  they  would  give  of  it,  there  would  be  a 
confusion  between  the  natural  geodesies  or  freepaths  of  par- 
ticles, and  the  direct  routes  of  the  measure-system ;  between 
the  regions  occupied  by  matter  and  the  regions  of  curvature 
of  the  measure-system.  The  confusion  would  be  of  the  same 
type  as  that  which  in  the  old  Newtonian  theory  would  exist 
between  actual  forces  producing  accelerations  and  apparent 
forces  arising  if  the  motion  of  the  frame  of  reference  was 
unknown.  Thus  it  appears  that  among  all  possible  measure- 
systems  there  are  some  in  which  there  is  a  specially  simple 
form  for  the  order  relations  inherent  in  the  physical  world. 
These  might  be  called  natural  measure-systems. 

Prof.  Eddington  states  the  conclusion  with  regard  to 
natural  measure-systems  differently.  What  has  been  called 


138       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

here  a  measure-system,  he  calls  a  "  species  of  space-time  ".  He 
asks  if  every  kind  of  space-time  can  occur  in  nature.  To  this 
he  replies,  "  No  !  Einstein's  law  is  a  law  which  determines  those 
kinds  of  space-time  which  can  occur  in  nature".  This  sug- 
gests that  material  phenomena  are  incapable  of  description 
on  the  background  of  any  kind  of  space-time  not  satisfying 
that  law.  But  if  the  view  expressed  above  is  correct,  this  is 
not  so. 

There  is  of  course  no  such  thing  as  a  measured  space- 
time.  We  may  speak  of  measuring  space  in  the  ordinary  ex- 
perimental sense ;  but  the  process  of  measuring  is  itself  a 
sorting  out  of  certain  relations  in  the  complex  of  phenomena. 
In  the  four-dimensional  world  in  which  all  phenomena  are 
laid  out  as  a  whole,  any  experiment  of  measuring  space  is 
laid  out  as  part  of  the  picture,  and  the  observations  are  simply 
of  the  fact  that  certain  world  lines  intersect  (see  §  99). 

We  must  interpret  Prof.  Eddington's  assertion  that  "  only 
certain  kinds  of  space-time  occur  in  nature"  in  the  sense 
that  only  certain  kinds  show  that  close  correspondence 
with  nature  which  enables  us  to  identify  matter  with  aspects 
of  curvature.  But  we  must  remember  that,  in  making  such 
an  identification,  we  are  simply  resuming  in  picturesque 
language  the  fact  that  experiment  confirms  Einstein's  law. 
Curvature  of  a  four-dimensional  manifold  is  a  mere  arith- 
metical conception,  it  is  form  without  content.  The  process 
of  identification  is  simply  a  recognition  that  the  order 
relations  of  the  physical  world  are  of  that  mathematical  type 
which  we  find  in  the  algebraic  theory  which,  by  analogy  with 
the  early  ideas  of  curvature,  we  call  the  theory  of  curvature 
in  four-dimension  or  five-dimension  space. 

in.  LEAST  ACTION. 

It  has  been  remarked  in  chapter  vii.,  p.  no,  that  Einstein's 
law  of  gravitation  follows  from  the  principle  of  least  action,  if 

we  take  as  the  action  the  expression        I  G  Jg  dx^  dx^  dxz  dx^ 

G  being  the  scalar  invariant  of  curvature,  which,  we  may  re- 
mind ourselves,  is  a  function  of  g^v  and  their  first  and  second 


FURTHER  GENERALIZATION  (WEYDS  THEORY}     139 

differential  coefficients.  In  applying  the  principle  of  least 
action  the  method  is  to  calculate  the  variation  of  this  expres- 
sion for  arbitrary  changes  in  g^v. 

Writing  SA  =         |   G^Sg*",    it  is  inferred  that  if  SA  =  o 

for  an  arbitrary  small  change  in  the  tensor  g*v,  then  we  must 
have  GMV  =  o.  This  stands  as  an  equation,  limiting  the  arbit- 
rariness otherwise  allowable  in  the  tensor  £•  . 

The  principle  of  least  action  in  its  physical  aspect  would 
then  say  that  the  happenings  in  nature  are  such  as,  when 
interpreted  in  terms  of  a  gravitational  field  g^n  cause  that  field 
to  be  such  that  this  function  of  its  whole  condition,  the  action 
has  a  least  (or  rather  stationary)  value. 

On  the  geometrical  side,  however,  if  we  think  of  g^v  with  a 
set  of  co-ordinates  as  constituting  a  measure-system,  the  law 
simply  stands  as  a  principle  of  selection  among  the  measure- 
systems.  We  arrive  at  the  conclusion  that,  in  order  to  obtain 
the  simplest  and  most  complete  correspondence  between  geometry 
and  natural  law,  we  have  to  choose  our  measure-system  in  such 

a  way  that  the  total  curvature,   I         G  *]g  dx  has  a  least  value. 

Here  of  course  we  are  not  considering  the  further  general- 
ization of  this  chapter. 

112.  WEYL'S  THEORY  OF  ELECTRICITY. 

In  Einstein's  theory  of  gravitation  as  described  in  the  last 
chapter,  a  certain  expression  GMI,  depending  on  g^v  and  its 
differential  coefficients  was  described.  The  vanishing  of  GMI, 
at  a  point,  indicated  the  absence  of  matter  at  that  point.  The 
coefficients  g^v  may  be  taken  as  characteristic  of  the  gravi- 
tational field,  and  GM|/  as  measuring  the  nature  of  the  matter 
at  any  point. 

We  have  now  contemplated  four  other  quantities  ^  In 
their  origin,  like  g^  they  arose  out  of  the  attempt  to 
express  order  relations  in  a  quantitative  form.  But  the 
possibility  of  establishing  a  close  correspondence  between  the 
properties  of  matter  and  those  of  the  measure-system  enabled 
us  to  give  to  g^v  a  physical  significance.  In  the  same  way  any 


140       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

correspondence  that  may  be  set  up  and  experimentally  con- 
firmed between  some  property  of  the  measure  system  involving 
<£M  and  some  property  of  matter  will  enable  us  to  give  a 
physical  significance  to  0M. 

Now  it  was  mentioned  above  that  I  fy^dx^  taken  round  any 

closed  curve  is  a  quantity  fixed  within  a  given  measure- 
system.  There  may  for  instance  be  regions  which  are  such 
that  this  quantity  vanishes  for  any  closed  curve  drawn  within 
the  region.  This  will  be  a  property  of  such  a  region  whatever 
changes  are  made  in  the  co-ordinate  system  or  in  <^,  subject 
only  to  the  measures  of  the  intervals  being  unvaried. 

But  if  the  g^  and  ^  are  varied  in  an  arbitrary  manner, 

clearly  \^>^dx^  will  not  be  an  invariant. 

Now   in   Weyl's    theory    any    region    which    is   such    that 
vanishes  for  all  curves  drawn  within  it  corresponds  to 


\ 


one  which  is  free  from  electric  and  magnetic  force.  Effectively 
this  means  that  the  four  quantities  are  identified  with  the 
electro-magnetic  potentials,1  or  conversely  that  in  a  field  which 
is  free  from  electric  and  magnetic  force  </>  has  a  unique  value  at 
end  pointy  and  therefore  the  interval  do-  has  a  definite  value. 

Here  as  in  the  gravitational  case  we  are  recognizing  simply 
a  community  of  form,  which  makes  it  possible  for  us  to 
identify  intrinsic  qualities  of  a  measure-system  with  qualities 
of  the  physical  universe.  Their  values  will  be  relative  to  the 
co-ordinate  system  adopted. 

1  Thus  :  if  we  put/Vfe  =  —  -  *»  --^p-»  the  necessary  and  sufficient  conditions 
9*fc        d*» 

that  I  0/i  dXfi.  =  o,  for  any  curve  within  a  region  are  that/i&  =  o  for  all  values  of 

i  and  k,  at  all  points  of  the  region. 

Putting  fa  =  (F,  G,  H,  and  *)  we  have 


c>F 


43 

which  enable  us  to  identify  F,  G,  H,  with  the  vector  potential  and  *  as  the 
scalar  potential,  (/14,  fw  /34)  being  the  electric  intensity  and  (/28i/si»/ia)  *he 
magnetic  intensity, 


FURTHER  GENERALIZATION  (WEYLS  THEORY]     141 

Further,  in  the  regions  in  which   l^/^  round  a  closed 

curve  does  not  vanish,  it  is  possible  out  of  the  functions  </>M  to 
construct  a  farther  set  of  quantities  SM,  the  relation  of  which 
to  <p^  is  identical  with  the  relation  of  the  stream  vector  p  (ux, 
uy,  ux,  c)  to  the  electro-magnetic  potentials  (see  p.  84).  The 
relation  between  S^  and  $M  is  preserved  in  any  arbitrary 
change  of  the  measure  system.  The  tensor  S^  represents  an 
intrinsic  quality  of  the  measure-system. 

Weyl's  hypothesis  is  that  it  is  possible  so  to  choose  the 
measure  system  that  the  regions  in  which  S^  =  o  correspond 
exactly  to  the  regions  in  which  there  is  no  electricity.  This  is 
the  complete  analogue  of  Einstein's  hypothesis  that  GM|/  =  o 
corresponds  to  the  absence  of  matter. 

The  justification  for  Weyl's  hypothesis  is  simply  the 
community  of  form  between  the  relations  SM  =  o  and  Max- 
well's equations.  They  are  indeed  identical.  So  far  there  is 
no  experimental  test  proposed  of  the  accuracy  of  the  hypo- 
thesis. But  there  is  much  to  recommend  it.  The  main 
points  in  its  favour  are  these : — 

(i)    The   analysis    proposed    is    forced    upon    us    by    the 

incompleteness  of  Riemann's  point  of  view. 
(ii)  The  attempt  to  carry  out  the  generalization  makes 
a  natural  place  for  a  tensor  ^  corresponding  to  the 
electro-magnetic  potentials  in  addition  to  the  tensor 
gpr  which  we  have  seen  can  represent  the  gravi- 
tational field. 

Thus  electricity  and  gravitation  are  placed  side  by  side  as 
fundamental  properties  of  our  perceived  universe,  common  to 
all  kinds  of  matter. 

It  will  to  some  extent  be  a  matter  of  the  predilection  of 
the  student  of  these  matters,  whether  he  will  now  consider 
that  the  physical  laws  of  the  universe  are  reduced  to  geomet- 
rical laws  or  the  reverse.  It  is  clear  that  the  course  of  nature 
is  more  closely  related  to  some  systems  of  measurement  than 
to  others — just  as  it  was  when  all  our  exact  laws  were 
comprised  in  Newtonian  dynamics.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
fact  that  we  are  able  to  make  such  an  excellent  guess  at  the 


142        RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

form  of  the  laws  of  nature  by  mere  geometrical  considerations, 
leaves  us  with  an  uneasy  feeling  that  we  are  looking  at  nature 
through  coloured  glasses,  and  are  simply  seeing  those  aspects 
of  phenomena  which  are  the  easiest  for  us  to  appreciate. 
This  however  is  the  usual  course  of  science,  and  it  is  something 
to  feel  that  this  most  comprehensive  of  physical  theories  itself 
suggests  that  when  our  power  of  vision  is  greater  we  shall 
discover  whole  new  realms  of  phenomena. 


113.  THE  CONSERVATION  OF  ELECTRIC  CHARGE. 

It  has  been  said  that  in  Weyl's  theory  a  certain  tensor 
SM  is  identified  with  the  stream  vector  of  electricity.  Now  we 
find  that  when  the  variables  <£M,  g^  and  the  co-ordinates  are 
altered  in  any  manner  consistent  with  leaving  the  interval 
measures  unchanged,  the  tensor  S^  satisfies  an  identical  invari- 
ant relation.  This  is  completely  analogous  to  the  four  identi- 
ties connecting  the  quantities  GMV  when  the  element  grs  dxv  dxs 
is  left  invariant  (cf.  §  89).  These  four  relations,  it  was  said 
above,  are  the  relations  which  embody  the  principles  of  con- 
servation of  energy  and  momentum,  energy  and  momentum 
being  special  aspects  of  the  tensor  GMl/  which  emerge  when 
we  resolve  our  four-dimensional  world  into  the  special 
aspects  space  and  time.  So  here,  when  SM  is  interpreted  in 
the  space-time  aspects  of  electric  charge  in  motion,  the 
identical  relation  which  it  satisfies  as  a  consequence  of  relativity 
stands  as  expressing  the  principle  of  the  conservation  of  electric 
charge. 

114.  WEYL'S  THEORY  AND  THE  ATOMIC  NATURE  OF 
ELECTRICITY. 

At  this  point  we  become  conscious  of  the  limits  of  Weyl's 
theory  as  so  far  expounded. 

The  hypothesis  is  that  it  is  possible  to  choose  certain 
measure-systems  so  that  certain  intrinsic  properties  of  the 
system  correspond  to  the  world  lines  of  the  electric  charges. 


FURTHER  GENERALIZATION  (WE YL'S  THEORY]     143 

In  the  light  of  the  electron  theory,  the  function  of  the  equations 
of  the  electric  field  is  to  co-ordinate  the  motions  of  electrons, 
to  predict  the  motion  of  an  electron  in  a  given  field.  If  we 
think  of  electricity  as  distributed  in  nuclei  of  extremely  small 
dimensions,  we  shall  have  the  equations 

SM-o 

as  characteristic  of  the  field  external  to  the  electrons.  These 
being  identical  in  form  with  Maxwell's  equations  will  lead  to 
the  usual  expressions  for  the  field  due  to  electrons  having 
prescribed  motions. 

But  it  has  already  been  pointed  out  (p.  24)  that  those 
equations  are  insufficient  to  determine  the  motion  of  any 
electron  without  some  further  information  as  to  the  structure 
of  the  electron  (e.g.  Lorentz'  contracting  electron)  or  some 
equivalent  hypothesis.  We  have  seen  that  the  Special 
Principle  of  Relativity  was  able  to  fill  the  gap  for  the  slowly 
accelerated  electron. 

If  we  seek  to  supplement  Weyl's  equation  by  some 
further  hypothesis,  we  have  this  elementary  treatment  to 
guide  us,  but  we  have  also  the  method  adopted  by  Einstein 
with  such  success  for  the  motion  of  the  material  particle. 
We  recall  that  having  by  means  of  the  equations  GMV  =  o 
determined  the  field  of  a  certain  specified  distribution  of 
matter,  the  path  of  the  free  particle  was  taken  to  be  a  geodesic 
of  this  field. 

This  would  be  a  possible  method  of  attack  in  the  electrical 
case.  Having  obtained  the  electric  field  of  a  given  distribution 
of  matter  and  electricity  (we  cannot  now  separate  the  two)  by 
means  of  the  equations  SM  =  o,  we  could  make  the  provisional 
hypothesis  that  in  this  field  the  world  line  of  a  free  electron 

is  a  direct  route,  that  is  a  path  for  which   \dcr  is  stationary. 

This  would  make  the  problem  of  determining  its  motion  a 
determinate  one,  would  involve  no  special  analysis  of  the 
constitution  of  the  electron,  and  it  would  be  consistent  with 
the  results  of  the  special  principle  which  have  been  verified 
experimentally.  But  this  is  speculation,  and  the  suggestion 
has  not  yet  been  explored. 


144       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

115.  SUMMARY  OF  MATHEMATICAL  SPECIFICATION  OF 
WEYL'S  THEORY. 

,„      30*     30* 

fik  =  o  —  ^z—  . 

C#*        C*t 

/**  =  ^  g**M. 
f» 

Definition  of  stream  of  electricity 

' 


Compare  with  this  Minkowski's  equations,  p.  84. 
These  give  |?*=  o 

which  is  the  equation  of  conservation  of  electricity. 

If  there  is  no  gravitation  grs=  o  if  r=£s,  also  g-n  =  gZ2  =  ^33  =  -  i,  and 
£44  =  +  *•     Tne  equations  then  reduce  exactly  to  Maxwell  equations. 

The  expression   for  the  action   in   a  region    not    occupied   by  charge  is 

flf*  f«  dr 

and  this  integral  is  proved  to  be  an  absolute  invariant  for  any  change  in  co- 
ordinates, or  in  the  potentials  </>M,  subject  to  the  intervals  being  unvaried. 

1  1  6.  COMPARATIVE  SURVEY. 

It  may  be  worth  while  to  set  down  here  a  comparison  of 
the  conclusions  from  Newton's  theory  of  dynamics,  Einstein's 
restricted  Principle  of  Relativity,  Einstein's  generalized  theory, 
and  finally  of  Weyl's  theory. 

I.  NEWTON.  —  In  the  region  of  dynamics,  of  all  possible 
co-ordinate  systems  there  is  a  limited  group  for  which  the 
laws  of   motion  have   a  particularly  simple   form.     In    any 
system  of  the  group  the  path  of  a  free  particle  is  a  straight 
line  described  uniformly. 

II.  EINSTEIN,  1905  —  Restricted  Principle  of  Relativity.  — 
In  the  region  of  dynamics  and  electro-dynamics,  of  all  possible 
co-ordinate  systems  there  is  a  limited  group  for  which  the  laws 
are  of  precisely  the  same  form.     In  any  system  of  this  group 
the  path  of  a  free   particle  is  a  straight  line  described  uni- 
formly, and  light  travels  with  constant  velocity. 

III.  EINSTEIN,  1915  —  General  Principle  of  Relativity.  —  In 
the  region  of  gravitational   phenomena,  there  is  no  restriction 
on  the  co-ordinate  system,  but  the  measure-system  is  limited 
by  the  hypothesis  (i)  that  the  world-line  of  a  free  particle  is  a 
direct  line  of  the  measure-system,  (ii)  that  the  curvature  GMI, 


FURTHER  GENERALIZATION  (WEYUS  THEORY]     145 

may  be  identified  with  the  presence  of  matter.  The  interval 
between  two  events  is  a  fixed  quantity  within  the  appropriate 
measure-system. 

IV.  WEYL's  THEORY. — In  electro-dynamic  as  in  gravi- 
tational phenomena,  there  is  no  restriction  on  the  co-ordinate 
system,  and  the  measure  of  the  interval  between  two  events 
is  not  a  definite  quantity  determined  by  the  gravitation  field. 
But  of  all  possible  measure-systems,  there  is  one,  or  a  limited 
group,  in  which  the  singular  regions  of  the  system  are  in  exact 
correspondence  with  the  regions  in  which  matter  or  electricity 
are  present. 

We  conclude  then  that  Einstein  has  satisfied  the  demand 
that  nature  itself  shall  not  show  any  preference  for  any 
particular  system  of  variables  or  co-ordinates  by  which  we 
shall  distinguish  between  events.  Further,  Weyl  has  made  it 
clear  that  the  laws  of  nature  do  not  supply  us  with  an  absolute 
criterion  of  equality  of  intervals  of  space  and  time,  except 
that  of  coincidence ;  in  fact  the  idea  of  a  definite  measurable 
interval  between  two  events  has  to  some  extent  broken  down. 
But  we  are  not  left  with  the  conclusion  that  we  may  adopt  an 
absolutely  arbitrary  system  of  measurement.  There  is  neces- 
sarily one  measure-system  or  a  limited  group,  within  which 
there  is  complete  relativity  of  co-ordinates,  in  which  there  is  a 
particularly  simple  correspondence  between  the  geometry  of 
the  system  and  nature ;  or  in  other  words,  for  which  the 
mathematical  relations  of  nature  take  the  simplest  possible 
form. 

In  the  end  we  must  admit  therefore  that  the  recognition 
of  order  in  the  sequences  of  events  around  us  arises  from  an 
adjustment  of  mental  machinery  to  the  events.  Just  as  we 
only  recognize  a  star  as  a  sharp  point  of  light  when  the  eye 
focusses  the  light  on  the  retina,  so  we  recognize  a  distinct 
order  in  the  universe  when  we  focus  our  measuring  system 
properly.  The  eye  has  an  infinity  of  ways  of  focussing  itself 
so  that  the  star  produces  a  blurred  image  on  the  retina.  So 
the  mind  may  form  many  images  of  nature  which  are  in  a 
sense  blurred,  in  which  a  distinct  order  is  not  perceptible. 
But  the  fact  that  the  eye  can  produce  a  sharp  image  is  enough 


146       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 

both  to  determine  our  conception  of  the  star,  and  to  define 
what  we  mean  by  the  proper  focus  for  the  star.  So  the 
problem  of  science  is  mainly  to  discover  that  mental  focus  in 
which  nature  gives  us  clear  impressions  of  order.  Einstein 
has  shown  that  this  may  be  done  in  a  way  far  more  compre- 
hensive than  had  been  thought  possible.  He  has  shown  us 
that  the  required  mental  focus  is  to  be  attained  without  any 
introduction  of  metaphysical  notions  such  as  those  of  an 
absolute  space  and  time,  or  even  of  such  a  remnant  of  those 
notions  as  that  light  shall  have  a  definite  velocity  the  same  at 
all  points. 


INDEX. 


ABERRATION,  16. 

Abraham,  38,  70,  81. 

Absolute,  time,  space,  velocity,  8. 

Action,  principle  of,  77,  83,  108,  no, 

138. 
Addition  of  velocities,  Einstein,  39. 

Newton,  n. 

yEther,  concealment  cf,  48. 

—  mechanics  of,  89. 

—  momentum  in,  81. 

—  penetrates  matter,  Fresnel,  16. 
Arago,  13. 

Atomic  nature  of  electricity,  52,  142. 

BESTELMEYER,  A.,  66. 
/3-rays,  64. 

Brace,  D.  B.,  see  Rayleigh,  56. 
Bucherer,  A.,  66. 

CATHODE-RAYS,  38,  68. 
Christoffel,  100. 
Clifford,  W.  K.,  100. 
Coincidence,  in  experimental  observa- 
tion, 29,  50,  93    126. 
Conservation,  oi  electricity,  48,  142. 

—  of  energy  and  momentum,    12,  79, 

in. 

—  of  mass,  48. 

Contracting  electron,  25,  56,  70. 
Contraction  hypothesis,  23,  23,  44. 

—  Larmor,  24. 

—  Lorentz,  24,  55. 
Convection  coefficient,  41,  43. 
Co-ordinate  systems,  and  propagation 

of  light,  95. 

relativity  of,  93. 

Couple  on  moving  condenser,  59. 

Curl  of  a  vector,  i. 

Curvature,  in  four  dimensions,  103. 

—  invariant  of,  108-9. 

—  specific,  102. 

DEFLECTION  of  light,  119. 

De  Sitter,  86. 

Direct  routes,  135. 

Dispersive  media,  convection  coefficient 

in,  43. 

Doppler  effect,  42. 
Dynamics,  Newtonian,  8,  10,  39,  78,  83. 

ECLIPSE  Expedition,  121,  127,  131. 
Economy  of  thought,  90. 
Eddington,  50,  112,  121,  137. 
Electric  intensity,  relativity  of,  46. 


Electric  intensity,  transformation  of,  48. 
Electricity,  46. 

—  atomic  nature  of,  52,  142. 

—  conservation  of,  48,  142. 

—  Weyl's  theory  of,  139. 
Electro-magnetic   field,    equations,  46, 

84. 

—  inertia,  25,  70. 

Electron,  apparent  mass  of,  68,  70. 

—  finite  size  of,  53. 

—  path  of,  143. 

—  theory  of  matter,  24,  52. 
Energy,  and  mass,  78. 

—  and  momentum,  79. 

—  conservation  of,  in. 
Eotvos,  87. 
Euclidean  geometry,  102. 

FITZGERALD,    contraction    hypothesis, 

22,  31,  57. 
Fizeau  experiment,  14,  16,  41. 
Force,  and  work,  78. 
generalized,  78. 

—  mechanical,  45. 

—  on  moving  charged  bodies,  59. 

—  relativity  of,  96. 
Four-dimensional  geometry,  103. 
Fresnel,  and  Arago,  13. 

—  convection  coefficient,  14,  41. 

GALILEO,  78. 

Gauss,  109. 

Geodesic,  107,  143. 

Geometry,  bases  of,  Riemann,  100. 

—  Euclidean,  102. 

—  four-dimensional,  103. 

—  non-Euc  idean,  123. 
Gravitation,   and   electrical   theory    of 

matter,  27,  86. 

—  and  light,  89. 

—  as  a  means  of  communication,  38. 

—  Einstein's  Law,  104,  105. 

—  real  and  simulated,  97. 
Gravitational,  field  round  the  sun,  113. 

—  mass,  87. 
Guage-system,  135. 

HAMILTON'S  principle,  108,  no. 
Hertz,  17. 
Hupka,  68,  70. 
Huyghens,  78. 

Hypothesis  of  constant  light-velocity, 
28. 


147 


148       RELATIVITY  AND  THE  ELECTRON  THEORY 


iNERTiA-mass,  87. 

Interval  between  events,  121,  133. 

Invariant,  action,  83,  112. 

—  charge,  12. 

—  element  of  integration,  109. 

—  of  curvature,  108,  139. 

KAUFMANN'S  experiments,  25,  64. 

LARMOR,  contraction  hypothesis,  24. 

—  point  electrons,  53. 

—  Rayleigh-Brace  experiment,  57. 

—  space-time  transformations,  35. 
Length,  dependent  on  velocity,  31. 
Levi-Civita,  too. 

Light,  constant  velocity,  33. 

—  deflection  of,  119. 

—  gravitational  effect  on,  89. 

MAGNETIC  intensity,  relativity  of,  46. 

Maps,  91. 

Mass  and  energy,  80. 

—  apparent,  of  electrons,  67. 
Matter,  gravitational  field  in  absence  of, 

105. 

—  modified    by   motion    through    the 

aether,  14,  17. 

—  tensor,  in. 
Maxwell,  17,  22,  87. 

Maxwell's  equations  in  Weyl's  theory, 
141. 

Measure-systems,  134. 

—  correspondence  with  nature,  136. 

Measuring-rod,  127. 

Mechanical  theory  derived  from  electri- 
cal, 61. 

Mechanics,  78. 

Mercury,  motion  of  perihelion,  113,117. 

Michelson,  A.  A.,  repetition  of  Fizeau's 
experiment,  6,  42,  44. 

Michelson-Morley   experiment,    17,  19, 
21,  23,  37,  54. 

Minkowski,  72,  83,  84,  94. 

Momentum  and  energy,  79. 

—  conservation  of,  12,  in. 

—  of  aether,  81. 

Morley,  E.  W.,  see  Michelson,  A.  A. 

—  and  Miller,  D.  B.,  18,  22,  23. 
Motion,  analysis  of  concept,  10. 

—  of  charged  particle,  62. 

—  of  free  particle  and  propagation  of 

light,  96. 

—  of  material  particle,  80. 

NEUMANN-Schaefer,  68,  71. 
Newtonian  dynamics,  8, 10,  38, 129, 144, 
Newtonian  potential,  99. 
Noble,  see  Trouton,  39,  58. 
Non-Euclidean  geometry,  123. 
Nordstrom,  86. 

OBJECTIONS  to  the  Principle  of  Relativ^ 

ity,  38.  4i. 
Observations,  nature  of,  93,  126. 


PATH   of  free  particle   has   stationary 

length,  96,  106. 
Perihelion  of  Mercury,  113. 
Planet,  law  of  motion  of,  115. 
Poincare,  86. 

Potential,  Newtonian,  99. 
Poynting,  flux  of  energy,  81. 
Propagation  of  light,  95-6. 

QUADRATIC  Form,  94. 

RANKINE,   A.  O.,  see  Trouton,  F.  T., 

Rayleigh,  Lord,  and  Brace,  D.  B.,  56. 
on  double  refraction  in  mov- 
ing bodies,  25. 
Relative  velocity,  40. 
Riemann,  100,  132. 
Ricci,  100. 
Rigid  body,  130. 

ScHAEFER-Neumann,  68,  71. 

Simultaneity,  29. 

Soddy,  41. 

Space  and  time,  absolute,  8. 

unified,  75. 

Space-time    transformations,    Lorentz, 

34,  73- 

Newtonian,  10. 

Spectral-shift,  suggested,  121. 
Stokes,  Sir  G.  G.,  on  aberration,  16. 
Sun,  gravitational  field  of,  113. 

TENSOR,  defining  kind  or  space-time, 

97- 

—  of  matter  or  energy,  in. 
Thomson,  J.  J.,  70. 
Transformations,  Lorentz,  34,  73. 

—  Newton,  10. 

—  of  charge,  48. 

—  of  electrical  intensity,  47. 
Trouton,  and  Noble,  39,  58,  82. 

—  and  Rankine,  57. 

VECTORS,  definitions  and  notation,  i. 

—  in  four  dimensions,  72. 
Velocity,  absolute,  8. 

—  addition  of,  Einstein,  39. 
Newton,  n. 

—  of  light,  constant,  33. 

critical,  40. 

in  moving  matter,  13. 

Velocity,  relative,  40. 

Verification  of  Einstein's  theory,  112. 

WEYL,  125,  139,  142,  145. 
Wolz,  66. 

World-line,  length  of,  106. 
Wright,  J.  E.,  100. 

ZEEMAN,  and  Fizeau's  experiment,  44. 

—  effect,  68. 

—  Eotvos'  experiment,  88. 


RETURN     CHEMISTRY  LIBRARY 

TO— •*     1  00  Hildebrand  Hall 


642-3753 


LOAN  PERIOD  1 


21  MONTH 


ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
Renewable  by  telephone 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
FORM  NO.  DD5,  3m,  12/80          BERKELEY,  CA  94720 


GK  6 


u  <